B-64112en 01 060302

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus
may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–9
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–64112EN/01
1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–2
B–64112EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
user.
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory–set. Usually, there is not need to change them.
When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
understand the function of the parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until
the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the
machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.
7. The operator’s manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machine’s functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described
in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of
the machine if in doubt.
s–3
WARNING
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. When
using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of their
use and any related cautions.
CAUTION
1. Do not remove the internal parts, including the ATA card and compact flash card, from within
the CNC.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently,
however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup
all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
s–4
3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING
This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to
perform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1. Coordinate system setting

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a
result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command.
Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause
injury to the user.
2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement
between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing
programming.
Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal–direction (perpendicular) control,
pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in the
rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to
lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely.
Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such
as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine,
therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary
to specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s–5
WARNING
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke
check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke
check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7. Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic
operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference
check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic
operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine
may behave unexpectedly.
9. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned cycle,
the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for
details.
10. Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without
performing a skip.
11. Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command
is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the
unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.
s–6
4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting
to operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully,
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece,
and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly.
Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the
machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
3. Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified
correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
4. Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes
the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid
tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the
control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the
tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.
s–7
WARNING
7. Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the
coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any shift
in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8. Software operator’s panel and menu switches
Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it
is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator’s panel, such as mode
change, override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the user.
9. Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path
may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention,
therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
10. Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.
11. Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that
the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt
in automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of
the corresponding functions for details.
13. Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion,
or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control
of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program
while it is in use.
s–8
5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details of the
battery replacement procedure.
s–9
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details of the
battery replacement procedure.
s–10
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operator’s manual or programming
manual describes the fuse replacement procedure.
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
s–11
B–64112E/01 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
I. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
II. NC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1. CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.1 NUMBER OF THE ALL CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 AXIS NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3.1 Input Unit (10 Times) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4 MAXIMUM STROKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1 POSITIONING (G00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.7 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4. THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1 EQUAL LEAD THREAD CUTTING (G33) (WITH G CODE SYSTEM A: G32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2 MULTIPLE–THREAD CUTTING (G33) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.3 VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING (G34) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.4 CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5. FEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.1 RAPID TRAVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.2 CUTTING FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2.1 Tangential Speed Constant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2.2 Cutting Feed Rate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2.3 Per Minute Feed (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2.4 Per Revolution Feed (G95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.2.5 One–digit F Code Feed (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
c–1
Table of Contents B–64112E/01
5.3 OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3.1 Feed Rate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3.2 Rapid Traverse Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3.3 Override Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3.4 Jog Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.4 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.5 RAPID TRAVERSE BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.6 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING
FEED INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.7 BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING
FEED INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.8 ERROR DETECTION (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.9 EXACT STOP (G09) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.10 EXACT STOP MODE (G61) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.11 CUTTING MODE (G64) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.12 TAPPING MODE (G63) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.13 AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE (G62) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.14 DWELL (G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.15 RAPID TRAVERSE BLOCK OVERLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6. REFERENCE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G28, G29) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK (G27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.5 2ND, 3RD AND 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.6 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.7 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.8 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.9 LINEAR SCALE EXPANSION FUNCTION WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING
REFERENCE MARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G92) (with G Code System A: G50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.2.2 Automatic Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.2.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G54 to G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.2.4 Counter Input in a Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.4 WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE CHANGE
(PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.5 ADDITIONAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEMS (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.6 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET (G92.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.7 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.8 PLANE SELECTION (G17, G18, G19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
c–2
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
8.4 DECIMAL POINT INPUT/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT INPUT . . . . . . . 82
8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.6 LINEAR AXIS AND ROTATION AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.7 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

9.1 S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.2 SPINDLE SPEED ANALOG OUTPUT (S ANALOG OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.3 SPINDLE SPEED SERIAL OUTPUT (S SERIAL OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.5 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.6 SPINDLE OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.7 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.8 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.9 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (G25, G26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
9.10 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.11 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.12 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.14 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
10.TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.1 T CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.2.1 Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.2.2 Extended Tool Life Management (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
11.AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.2 1–BLOCK PLURAL M COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.3 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

12.1 PROGRAM NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.2 PROGRAM NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.3 MAIN PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.4 SUB PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
12.5 EXTERNAL MEMORY AND SUB PROGRAM CALLING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
c–3
12.7 TAPE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

12.8 BASIC ADDRESSES AND COMMAND VALUE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12.9 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12.10 LABEL SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12.11 CONTROL-IN/CONTROL-OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12.12 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12.13 ADDITIONAL OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12.14 TAPE HORIZONTAL (TH) PARITY CHECK AND TAPE VERTICAL (TV)
PARITY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

13.1 CANNED CYCLES (G73, G74, G76, G80-G89, G98, G99) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
13.2 RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.2.1 Rigid Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.2.2 Rigid Tapping Bell–shaped Acceleration/Deceleration (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.3 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION (G81) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.4 CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.4.1 Cutting Cycle A (G77) (with G Code System A: G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle (G78) (with G Code System A: G92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
13.4.3 Turning Cycle in Facing (G79) (with G Code System A: G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.5 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES FOR TURNING (G70 - G76) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.5.1 Stock Removal in Turning (G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.5.2 Stock Removal in Facing (G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
13.5.3 Pattern Repeating (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
13.5.4 Finishing Cycle (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13.5.5 Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.5.6 Grooving in X-axis (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.5.7 Thread Cutting Cycle (G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.6 CANNED CYCLES FOR DRILLING (G80 - G89) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.7 CHAMFERING AND CORNER R (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.8 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING/CORNER ROUNDING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.9 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
13.10 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13.11 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.12 CANNED CYCLES FOR CYLINDRICAL GRINDING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
13.12.1 Traverse Grinding Cycle (G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.12.2 Traverse Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.12.3 Oscillation Grinding Cycle (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.12.4 Oscillation Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.13 SURFACE GRINDING CANNED CYCLE (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.13.1 Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.13.2 Plunge Direct Grinding Cycle (G77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
13.13.3 Continuous Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.13.4 Intermittent Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
13.14 INFEED CONTROL (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
14.TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

14.1 TOOL OFFSET (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
14.1.1 Tool Offset (T Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
c–4
14.1.2 Tool Geometry Compensation and Tool Wear Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

14.2 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
14.3 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
14.4 TOOL OFFSET (G45, G46, G47, G48) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
14.5 CUTTER COMPENSATION (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.5.1 Cutter Compensation C (G40 - G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.6 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.6.1 Tool Compensation Memory (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.6.2 Tool Offset Amount Memory (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.7 NUMBER OF TOOL OFFSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.7.1 Number of Tool Offsets (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.7.2 Number of Tool Offsets (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.8 CHANGING OF TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT (PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . 168
14.9 GRINDING-WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY
CONTINUOUS DRESSING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
15.ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

15.1 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
15.2 BI–DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
15.3 BACKLASH COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
15.4 BACKLASH COMPENSATION FOR EACH RAPID TRAVERSE AND CUTTING FEED . . . . . 173
15.5 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10, G11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

16.1 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
16.2 SCALING (G50, G51) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
17.MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

17.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
17.2 MULTI-STEP SKIP FUNCTION (G31 P1 - G31 P4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
17.3 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
17.4 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP (G31 P99, G31 P98) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
17.5 TOOL LENGTH AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT (G37) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
17.6 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (G37, G36) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
17.7 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
17.8 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED/DIRECT INPUT OF
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT AMOUNT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
17.9 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
17.10 TOOL OFFSET VALUE COUNT INPUT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
17.11 DIRECT INPUT OF WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE MEASURED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
18.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

18.1 CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
18.2 ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
18.3 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
18.4 PATTERN DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
c–5
18.5 MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
19.SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

19.1 SERIES–10/11 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
20.FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

20.1 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
20.2 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G05.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
20.3 AI CONTOUR CONTROL (G05.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
21.AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

21.1 FOLLOW UP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
21.2 MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
21.3 SERVO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
21.4 MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
21.5 CONTROL AXIS DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
21.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
21.7 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
21.8 POLYGON TURNING (G50.2, G51.2) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
21.9 AXIS CONTROL WITH PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
21.10 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
21.11 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
21.12 TANDEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
21.13 TANDEM DISTURBANCE ELIMINATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
21.14 TEMPORARY ABSOLUTE COORDINATE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
22.MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

22.1 JOG FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
22.2 INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
22.3 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (1ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
22.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (2ND, 3RD) (T SERIES: 2ND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
22.5 JOG AND HANDLE SIMULTANEOUS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
22.6 MANUAL PER–REVOLUTION FEED (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
22.7 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
23.AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

23.1 OPERATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.1.1 DNC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.1.2 Memory Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.1.3 MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.2 SELECTION OF EXECUTION PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.2.1 Program Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.2.2 Sequence Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.2.3 Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.2.4 External Workpiece Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.2.5 Expanded External Workpiece Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
c–6
23.3 ACTIVATION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

23.3.1 Cycle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
23.4 EXECUTION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
23.4.1 Buffer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
23.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.1 Program Stop (M00, M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.2 Program End (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.4 Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.5 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.5.6 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.6 RESTART OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.6.1 Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.6.2 Manual Intervention and Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.7 MANUAL INTERRUPTION DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.7.1 Handle Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.8 SCHEDULING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
23.9 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
23.9.1 Retraction for Rigid Tapping by Specifying G30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
24.PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

24.1 ALL-AXES MACHINE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
24.2 MACHINE LOCK ON EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
24.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
24.4 DRY RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
24.5 SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
25.SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

25.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
25.1.1 7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
25.1.2 8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
25.1.3 7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
25.1.4 8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
26.DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

26.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
26.2 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
26.3 CLOCK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
26.4 RUN TIME & PARTS NUMBER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
26.5 SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
26.6 DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
26.7 GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
26.7.1 Graphic Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
26.7.2 Dynamic Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
26.8 SERVO WAVEFORM FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
26.9 SCREENS FOR SERVO DATA AND SPINDLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
26.9.1 Servo Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
26.9.2 Servo Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
26.9.3 Spindle Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
c–7
26.9.4 Spindle Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

26.9.5 Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
26.10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
26.11 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
26.12 DATA PROTECTION KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
26.13 DISPLAYING OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
26.14 REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
26.15 DIRECTORY DISPLAY AND PUNCH FOR EACH GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
26.16 ERASE CRT SCREEN DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
26.17 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
26.18 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
26.19 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
26.20 ID INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
26.20.1 Servo Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
26.20.2 αi Spindle Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
26.21 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
26.22 PARAMETER SET SUPPORTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
27.PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

27.1 FOREGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
27.2 BACKGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
27.3 EXTANDED PART PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.4 NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.5 PART PROGRAM STORAGE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.6 PLAY BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.7 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.8 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
27.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
28.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

28.1 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
28.2 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
29.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

29.1 READER/PUNCH INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
29.2 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
29.2.1 FANUC Floppy Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
29.2.2 FANUC Program File Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
29.2.3 FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
29.3 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
29.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
29.5 DNC OPERATION WITH MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
29.6 DNC2 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
29.7 ETHERNET FUNCTION (OPTION BOARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
29.7.1 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
29.7.2 Data Server Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
c–8
29.8 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

29.9 FIELD NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
30.SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

30.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
30.2 OVERTRAVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
30.2.1 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
30.2.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
30.2.3 Stored Stroke Check 2 (G22, G23) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
30.2.4 Stored Stroke Checks 2 and 3 (G22, G23) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
30.2.5 Stroke Limit Check Before Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
30.2.6 Stroke Limit Externally Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
30.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
30.3 INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.1 Interlock for Each Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.2 All Axes Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.3 Interlock for Each Axis Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.4 Start Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.5 Block Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.3.6 Cutting Block Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
30.4 EXTERNAL DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
30.5 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
31.STATUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

31.1 NC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.2 SERVO READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.3 REWINDING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.5 DISTRIBUTION END SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION START SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.8 FEED HOLD SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.9 RESET SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.10 IN–POSITION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.11 MOVE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
31.12 AXIS MOVE DIRECTION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.13 RAPID TRAVERSING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.14 TAPPING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.15 THREAD CUTTING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.16 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.17 INCH INPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.18 DI STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
31.19 POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
32.EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

32.1 EXTERNAL TOOL COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
32.2 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
c–9
32.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

32.4 EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
32.5 EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
32.6 EXTERNAL OPERATOR’S MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
32.7 SUBSTITUTION OF THE NUMBER OF REQUIRED PARTS AND NUMBER OF
MACHINED PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
33.KEY INPUT FROM PMC (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
34.FUNCTIONS FOR PUNCH PRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

34.1 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
34.2 PRESS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
34.2.1 One–cycle Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
34.2.2 Continuous Press (Nibbling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
34.2.3 Manual Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
34.2.4 Positioning and Press off (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.2.5 Setting for Press Start Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.2.6 Press Start Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.2.7 Press Start Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.2.8 Changeable Nibbling Mode 2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.2.9 External Motion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
34.3 SWITCHING RAPID TRAVERSE FEEDRATES, TIME CONSTANTS,
AND/OR SERVO LOOP GAINS ACCORDING TO THE POSITIONING DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 305
34.4 POSITIONING TIME CONSTANT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
34.5 PATTERN FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
34.5.1 Bolt Hole Circle (G26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
34.5.2 Line at Angle (G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
34.5.3 Arc (G77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
34.5.4 Grid (G78, G79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
34.5.5 Share Proof (G86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
34.5.6 Square (G87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
34.5.7 Radius (G88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
34.5.8 Cut at Angle (G89) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
34.6 PATTERN BASE POINT COMMAND (G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
34.7 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
34.8 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
34.9 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
34.9.1 Storage of Macro (U, V Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
34.9.2 Macro Call (W Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
34.9.3 Multiple Call of Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
34.9.4 Storage Capacity of Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
34.9.5 Storage and Call of Plural Macro (Macro No.90 to 99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
34.10 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
34.10.1 Base Point Command of Multi–piece Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
34.10.2 Multi–piecemachining Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
34.10.3 Setting of Processing Method of Multi–piece Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
34.10.4 Command to Restart Punching Multiple Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
34.11 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
34.12 SAFETY ZONE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
34.12.1 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
34.12.2 Setting the Safety Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
c–10
34.12.3 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

34.13 TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
34.13.1 T Code Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
34.13.2 T–axis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
34.13.3 Ignoring T–code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
34.13.4 Tool Offset Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
34.13.5 Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
34.14 C AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
34.14.1 Relation with Absolute/Incremental Command (G90/G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
34.14.2 Positioning to Smaller Angle Rotation Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
34.14.3 Relation between T Command and C Axis Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
34.14.4 Controlling the Punch and Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
34.14.5 C–axis Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
34.14.6 C–axis Backlash Compensation for Individual Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
34.15 S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
34.16 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
35.INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

35.1 FANUC SERVO MOTOR (β SERIES I/O LINK OPTION MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE
(PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
2. PROCESS ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
3. G–CODE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4. M–CODE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
5. CANNED CYCLE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

5.1 CYCLE MACHINING FOR MACHINING CENTERS (OR MILLING MACHINES) . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.2 CYCLE MACHINING FOR LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6. OPERATIONS OF CONTOUR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

6.1 AUXILIARY CALCULATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
APPENDIX
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
A.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
A.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

B.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
B.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
c–11
I. GENERAL
B–64112EN/01 GENERAL 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This manual describes the following models and may use the following
abbreviations.
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 0i–TC 0i–TC
FANUC Series 0i–MC 0i–MC Series 0i
FANUC Series 0i–PC 0i–PC
FANUC Series 0i Mate–TC 0i Mate–TC

Series 0i Mate
FANUC Series 0i Mate–MC 0i Mate–MC
For ease of understanding, the models may be categorized as follows:

T series: 0i–TC, 0i Mate–TC
M series: 0i–MC, 0i Mate–MC
3
1. GENERAL GENERAL B–64112EN/01
Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i–C, Series 0i
Series 0i–C/0i Mate–C Mate–C.
This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C/0i Mate–MODEL C B–64112EN *
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C/0i Mate–MODEL C B–64113EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C/0i Mate–MODEL C B–64113EN–1

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
FANUC Series 0i–PC B–64153EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
FANUC Series 0i–TC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–64114EN
FANUC Series 0i–MC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–64124EN
FANUC Series 0i Mate–TC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–64134EN
FANUC Series 0i Mate–MC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–64144EN
FANUC Series 0i–PC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–64154EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC Series 0i–PC PARAMETER MANUAL B–64160EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler/Macro Executor B–61803E–1

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
FANUC MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) B–66102E

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
PMC
PMC Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E
PMC C Language PROGRAMMING MANUA B–61863E–1
Network
PROFIBUS–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN
Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board B–63354EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER B–63644EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN
4
B–64112EN/01 GENERAL 1. GENERAL
Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR
SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis αis/αi/βis series
series Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series B–65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series B–65302EN

DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis series B–65270EN

PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B–65272EN

DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βis series B–65312EN

DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series B–65270EN

PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series B–65282EN

DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series B–65322EN

DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series B–65285EN

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series B–65325EN

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–64112EN/01
2 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
f : Standard fA : Standard of Package A fB : Standard of Package B F : Standard option FA : Standard option of Package A
FB : Standard option of Package B l : Option lA : Option of Package A : : Function included in another option — : Not available
Note) Some combinations of these options are restricted.
Note) In case of CNC Display with Personal Computer function, using CNC Screen Display Function is a premise.
Series 0i Series 0i Mate

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Controlled axis
Controlled path 1 path f f f f f
d axes
axes
4 axes f l f — —
Controlled axis
rolled
3 axes — f(Cs)/l — f f(Cs)

controlle
(Including Cs axes)
2 axes — f — — f
e cont
Simultaneously Max. 4 axes f f f — —

Machine
controlled axes Max. 3 axes — — — f f(Cs)

Machin
Axis control by PMC Max. simultaneous 4 axes (Not available on Cs axes) f f f — —

Cs contouring control 1 axis f f — — f
Basic three axes are X, Y and Z, additional axes are
f — — f —
optional from U, V, W, A, B and C.
In case of G code system A, basic 2 axes are X and
— f — — f
Z, additional axes are optional from Y, A, B and C.
Axis name In case of G code system B/C, basic 2 axes are X and
Z, additional axes are optional from Y, U, V, W, A, B — f — — f
and C.
Basic two axes are X and Y, additional axes are
— — f — —
optional from Z, U, V, W, A, B, C and T.
2 units f f — — —
Spindle
1 unit — — — f f
Simple synchronous control f f f — —
Angular axis control l l — — —
Arbitrary angular axis control — l — — —
Tandem control f f f — —
Tandem Disturbance Elimination Control l l l — —
Least input increment 0.001mm, 0.001deg, 0.0001inch f f f f f
Increment system 1/10 0.0001mm, 0.0001deg, 0.00001inch f f — f f
Flexible feed gear Optional DMR f f f f f
Fine Acc & Dec control f f f f f
Servo HRV control HRV3 f f f f f
Inch/metric conversion f f f f f
All axes/each axis/each direction/block start/cutting
Interlock f f f f f
block start
Machine lock All axes/each axis f f f f f
Emergency stop f f f f f
Overtravel f f f f f
Stored stroke check 1 f f f f f
Stroke limit external setting f — f f —
Stored stroke check 2 f — f f —
Stored stroke check 2, 3 — f — — f
Stroke limit check before move f f — f f
Chuck and tail stock barrier — f — — f
Mirror image Each axis f f f f f
Follow–up f f f f f
Servo off f f f f f
Chamfering on/off — f — — f
Backlash compensation f f f f f
6
B–64112EN/01 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Backlash compensation for each rapid
f f f f f
traverse and cutting feed
Stored pitch error compensation f f f f f
Bi–directional pitch error compensation l l l — —
Position switch f f f f f
Unexpected disturbance torque
f f f — —
detection function
Control axis detach f f — f f
Linear scale I/F with absolute address
l l l — —
reference mark
Linear scale with absolute address
l l — — —
reference mark expansion
Temporary absolute coordinate setting l l — — —
Operation
Automatic operation (memory) f f f f f
DNC operation Reader/puncher interface is required. f f f f f
DNC operation with Memory Card PCMCIA Card Attachment is required. f f f f f
MDI operation f f f f f
Schedule function f f f f f
Program number search f f f f f
Sequence number search f f f f f
Sequence number comparison and
f f f f f
stop
Program restart f f — f f
Manual intervention and return f f — f f
Retraction for rigid tapping f — — f —
Buffer register f f f f f
Dry run f f f f f
Single block f f f f f
JOG feed f f f f f
Manual reference position return f f f f f
Reference position setting without
f f f f f
DOG
Reference position setting with
f f — f f
mechanical stopper
Reference position shift f — f — —
Manual handle feed MC, PC : Max. 3 units TC : Max. 2 units f f f f f
Manual handle feed rate 1, 10, m, n m: 0 to 127, n: 0 to 1000 f f f f f
Manual handle interruption f f f f f
Manual handle I/F for I/O Link β l l l l l
Incremental feed 1, 10, 100, 1000 f f f f f
Jog and handle simultaneous mode f f f f f
Interpolation functions
Positioning G00 (Linear interpolation type positioning is possible) f f f f f
Single direction positioning G60 f — — f —
Exact stop mode G61 f — f f —
Exact stop G09 f — f f —
Linear interpolation f f f f f
Circular interpolation Multi–quadrant is possible f f f f f
Dwell in seconds and dwell in revolution
Dwell (In case of dwell in revolution for M series, threading, f f f f f
synchronous cutting function is required.)
Polar coordinate interpolation — f — — f
Cylindrical interpolation f f — — f
Circular interpolation plus max. 2 axes linear
Helical interpolation f l f f —
interpolation
Threading, synchronous cutting f f — f f
Multiple threading — f — — f
Threading retract — f — — f
Continuous threading — f — — f
7

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Interpolation functions
Variable lead threading — f — — —
Polygon turning — f — — —
Skip G31 f f f f f
High–speed skip Input signal is 1 point f f f f f
Multi–step skip For grinding machine l l — l l
Torque limit skip — f — — f
Reference position return G28 f f f f f
Reference position return check G27 f f — f f
2nd reference position return f f — f f
3rd/4th reference position return f f — f f
Normal direction control f — f — —
Continuous dressing For grinding machine l — — — —
Infeed control For grinding machine l — — — —
Index table indexing f — — — —
General purpose retract f f — f f
Feed function
Max. 240m/min (1µm) f f f f f
Rapid traverse rate
Max. 100m/min (0.1µm) f f f — —
Rapid traverse override Fo, 25, 50, 100% PC : 25, 50, 75, 100% f f f f f
Feed per minute f f f f f
Feed per revolution f f — f f
Tangential speed constant control f f f f f
Cutting feedrate clamp f f f f f
Rapid traverse: linear
Automatic acceleration/deceleration f f f f f
Cutting feed: exponential
Rapid traverse bell–shaped
f f f f f
acceleration/deceleration
Linear acceleration/deceleration after
f f f f f
cutting feed interpolation
Bell–type acceleration/deceleration
l — — — —
after cutting feed interpolation
Bell–type acceleration/deceleration
lA — — — —
before look ahead interpolation
Feedrate override 0 to 254% f f f f f
One–digit F code feed f — — f —
Inverse time feed f — — — —
Jog override 0 to 655.34% f f f f f
Override cancel f f f f f
Manual per revolution feed — f — — f
Error detection — f — — f
Cutting mode f — f f —
Tapping mode f — — f —
Rapid traverse block overlap f f — f f
External deceleration f f f f f
Advanced preview control — l — — —
AI advanced preview control f — — f —
AI contour control lA — — — —
Rigid tapping bell–shaped
l — — — —
Program input
Tape code EIA RS244/ISO840 f f f f f
Label skip f f f f f
Parity check Horizontal and vertical parity f f f f f
Control in/out f f f f f
Optional block skip 9 f f f f f
Max. programmable dimension 8–digit f f f f f
Program number O4–digit f f f f f
8

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Program input
External memory and sub program
f f f f f
calling function
Sequence number N5–digit f f f f f
Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block f f f f f
Decimal point programming/pocket
calculator type decimal point f f f f f
programming
Input unit 10 time multiply f f f f f
Diameter/radius programming (X axis) — f — — f
Plane selection G17, G18, G19 f f f f f
Rotary axis designation f f f — f
Rotary axis roll–over f f f — f
Polar coordinate command f — — f —
Coordinate system setting f f f f f
Automatic coordinate system setting f f f f f
Coordinate system shift — f — — f
Direct input of coordinate system shift — f — — f
Workpiece coordinate system G52 to G59 f f f f f
Workpiece coordinate system preset f f — f f
Addition of workpiece coordinate
48 pairs f — — f —
system pair
Direct input of workpiece origin offset
f f — f f
value measured
Manual absolute on and off f f f(on) f f
Direct drawing dimension programming — f — — f
G code system A/B/C — f — — f
Chamfering/corner R — f — — f
Optional chamfering/corner R f — — f —
Programmable data input G10 f f f f f
Sub program call 4 folds nested f f f f f
Custom macro B f f f f f
Addition of custom macro common
#100 to #199, #500 to #999 f f f f f
variables
Pattern data input f f — f f
Interruption type custom macro f f f f f
Canned cycles — f — — f
Multiple repetitive cycle — f — — f
Multiple repetitive cycle II Pocket profile — f — — —
Canned cycles for drilling f f — f f
Small–hole peck drilling cycle f — — f —
Canned cycles for grinding For grinding machine l l — — —
Circular interpolation by R programming f f f f f
Mirror image for double turret — f — — —
Automatic corner override f — f f —
Automatic corner deceleration f — f f —
Feedrate clamp based on arc radius f — f f —
Scaling f — f f —
Coordinate system rotation f — f f —
Programmable mirror image f — — f —
Tape format for FANUC Series 10/11 f f — f f
Conversational programming with
Display unit with graphic is required. : : : : :
graphic function
Macro executor l(512KB/2MB/4MB) l(512KB)
MANUAL GUIDE 0i
ISO code part programming l l — l l
Process control information l l — l l
G–code assistance l l — l l
M–code assistance l l — l l
9

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
MANUAL GUIDE 0i
Contour programming
Max. figure block
40 40 — 40 40
number
Start point l l — l l
Offset setting G40/G41/G42, No output l l — l l
Figure type Line, Arc CW, Arc CCW, Corner R, Chamfering l l — l l
Figure modification Insert, Delete, Re–calculation l l — l l
Check contour figure Graphical display of entered figures l l — l l
Convert to ISO code
G01/G02/G03 form l l — l l
prog.
Calculation of inputting
+, –, , /, Sin, Cos, Tan, Square root l l — l l
data
Data value unit IS–B, IS–C l l — l l
Contour programming
auxiliary calculation
A point by polar
l l — l l
coordinate
A point by angle and
l l — l l
dist.
A point by rotating a
l l — l l
point
Neighbor point of a line l l — l l
Cross point between 2
l l — l l
lines
Cross point line and
l l — l l
arc
Cross point between 2
l l — l l
arcs
Angle of 2 points line l l — l l
Angle of rectangular
l l — l l
line
Arc with 1 point and
l l — l l
center
Arc with 2 points and
l l — l l
radius
Arc with 3 points l l — l l
Advanced canned cycle for milling
Center, Drilling, Tapping, Reaming, Boring, Fine
Hole machining l — — l —
boring, Back boring
Points, Line(EQ), Line(NE), Grid, Square, Circle,
Hole pattern l — — l —
Arc(EQ), Arc(NE)
Facing (Rough/Finish) Square, Circle (fixed pattern) l — — l —
Pocketing
Square, Circle, Track (fixed pattern) l — — l —
(Rough/Finish)
Pocketing (Drilling) Square, Circle, Track (fixed pattern) l — — l —
Grooving
Radial line (fixed pattern) l — — l —
(Rough/Finish)
Grooving
Radial line (fixed pattern) l — — l —
(Chamfer/Drilling)
Advanced canned cycle for lathe
Lathe drilling Center, Drilling, Tapping, Reaming, Boring — l — — l
Stock removal in
Outer, Inner, Face — l — — l
turning
Finishing Outer, Inner, Face — l — — l
Threading Outer, Inner — l — — l
Threading type General, Metric, Unified, PT, PF — l — — l
Grooving Outer, Face — l — — l
Grooving type Normal, Trapezoidal — l — — l
10

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
MANUAL GUIDE 0i
Canned grinding cycle for surface
grinding machine
Plunge grinding cycle G75 (under development) l — — l —
Direct constant–
dimension plunge G77 (under development) l — — l —
grinding cycle
Continuous–feed
G78 (under development) l — — l —
surfae grinding cycle
Intermittent–feed
G79 (under development) l — — l —
surface grinding cycle
Canned grinding cycle for cylindrical
grining machine
Traverse grinding
G71 — l — — l
cycle
Traverse direct fixed–
dimension grinding G72 — l — — l
cycle
Oscillation grinding
G73 — l — — l
cycle
Oscillation direct fixed
dimension grinding G74 — l — — l
cycle
Auxiliary/Spindle speed function
Auxiliary function M8–digit f f f f f
2nd auxiliary function B8–digit f f f f f
Auxiliary function lock f f f f f
High–speed M/S/T/B interface f f f f f
Multiple command of auxiliary function 3 f f f f f
Spindle speed function S5–digit, binary output f f — f f
Spindle serial output S5–digit, serial output F F — F F
Spindle analog output S5–digit, analog output F F — F F
Constant surface speed control f f — f f
Spindle override 0 to 254% f f — f f
Actual spindle speed output — f — — f
Spindle speed fluctuation detection — f — — —
1st spindle orientation f f — f f
1st spindle output switching function f f — f f
2nd spindle orientation f f — — —
2nd spindle output switching function f f — — —
Spindle synchronous control f f — — —
Multi spindle control — f — — —
Spindle positioning — f — — f
Rigid tapping f f — f f
Tool function/Tool compensation

T7 + 1/T6 + 2 digits — f — — f
Tool function
T8 digits f — f f —
6 digits 32 — — f — —
Tool offset pairs 6 digits 64 — f — — f
6 digits 400 f — — f —
Distinction between geometry and wear, or between
Tool offset memory C f — — f —
cutter and tool length compensation.
Tool length compensation f — — f —
Tool offset f f — f f
Y–axis offset — f — — —
Cutter compensation C f — f f —
Tool nose radius compensation — f — — f
Tool geometry/wear compensation — f — — f
Tool life management f f — f f
Extended tool life management f — — f —
11

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Tool function/Tool compensation

Tool offset value counter input — f — — f
Tool length measurement f — — f —
Automatic tool length measurement f — — f —
Automatic tool offset — f — — —
Direct input of tool offset value
— f — — f
measured
Direct input of tool offset value
— f — — f
measured B
Punch press function
1 cycle press — — f — —
Manual press 1 cycle/continuity — — f — —
Positioning & press off G70 — — f — —
Setting for press start signal — — f — —
Press start lock — — f — —
Press start wait — — f — —
Nibbling G68, G69, M code — — f — —
Changeable nibbling mode 2 steps By nibbling pitch — — f — —
External motion function EF output — — f — —
Stroke limit check before move Only for G00 — — f — —
Safety zone check — — f — —
Changeable Rapid traverse rate/time
constant according to positioning X, Y axis: 7 steps — — f — —
distance
Positioning time constant control X, Y axis: 2 steps — — f — —
Changeable position loop gain X, Y axis: 7 steps(Only for positioning) — — f — —
Advanced preview control — — f — —
G code system A/B — — f — —
Pattern function — — f — —
Pattern base point command G72 — — f — —
Memory and call by A/B macro 5 — — f — —
U/V/W macro — — f — —
Multi–piece machining — — f — —
Command for restarting multi–piece
— — f — —
machining
Repositioning G75, M code — — f — —
Bending compensation G38, G39 — — f — —
S function S5–digit, binary output — — f — —
Number of registerble tool number 136 — — f — —
T axis control — — f — —
Tool offset — — f — —
T–command neglect — — f — —
Tool life management — — f — —
C axis control — — f — —
C axis backlash compensation for
— — f — —
each index
C axis offset — — f — —
Editing operation
320m (128Kbyte) fB fB — — —
Part program storage length *2
640m (256Kbyte) fA fA fA f f
Number of registerable programs 400 f f f f f
Part program editing f f f f f
Program protect f f f f f
Background editing f f f f f
Extended part program editing f f f f f
Playback f f — f f
Password function f f f f f
Setting and display
12

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Setting and display

Status display f f f f f
Clock function f f f f f
Current position display f f f f f
Program display Program name 31 characters f f f f f
Parameter setting and display f f f f f
Parameter set supporting screen f f — f f
Machining condition selecting function l l — l —
Self–diagnosis function f f f f f
Alarm display f f f f f
Alarm history display f f f f f
Operator message history display f f f f f
Operation history display f f f f f
Help function f f f f f
Machine remote diagnosis package and Ethernet are
Remote diagnostic required. : : : — —
(Function:Reading CNC/PMC status, etc.)
Run hour and parts count display f f f f f
Actual cutting feedrate display f f f f f
Display of spindle speed and T code
: f : : f
at all screens
Directory display of floppy cassette f f f f f
Directory display and punch for each
f f f f f
group
Graphic function : : l : :
Dynamic graphic display l l — l l
Servo setting screen f f f f f
Spindle setting screen Serial spindle only : : — : :
Servo waveform display Display unit with graphic is required. : : : : :
Display of hardware and software
f f f f f
configuration
Periodic maintenance screen f f f f f
Maintenance information screen f f f f f
Machine alarm diagnosis l l — l l
Trouble diagnosis f f f f f
Software operator’s panel f f f f f
Software operator’s panel
f f f f f
general purpose switch
English f f f f f
Japanese (Chinese character) f f f f f
German/French f f f f f
Italian f f f f f
Chinese (Traditional Chinese) f f — f f
Chinese (Simplified Chinese)
: : : : :
Display unit with graphic is required.
Multi–language display Spanish f f f f f
Korean f f — f f
Portuguese f f f f f
Polish f f — f f
Hungarian f f — f f
Swedish f f — f f
Dutch f — — f —
Czech f f — f f
Data protection key 4 types f f f f f
Erase CRT screen display f f f f f
CNC screen display : : : — —
Dual screen of CNC screen display
l l l — —
function
13

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Data input/output
Reader/puncher (Ch.1) interface f f f f f
Reader/puncher interface
Reader/puncher (Ch.2) interface f f f f f
Data server l l l — —
External I/O device control f f f f f
Uploading/downloading a part program,
DNC2 control Reading/writing CNC data, Transfer of PMC data, l l l — —
Memory operation control, etc.
External tool offset f f f f f
External message f f f f f
External machine zero point shift f f f f f
External data input Including above 3 items f f f f f
External key input f f f f f
External program input f f f f f
External workpiece number search 9999 f f f f f
Expanded external workpiece number
f f f f f
search
External program number search 1 to 9999 f f f f f
Memory card input/output f f f f f
Power Mate CNC manager f f f f f
External touch panel I/F SNP protocol l l l l l
Interface function
FAST Ethernet Ethernet board is required. l l l — —
PROFIBUS–DP Master/Slave l l l — —
DeviceNet Master/Slave l l l — —
FL–net — — — — —
Others
NC ready, servo ready, automatic operation,
automatic operation start lamp, feed hold, reset,
Status output signal f f f f f
NC alarm, distribution end, rewinding, inch input,
cutting, inposition, thread cutting, tapping, etc.
7.2 monochrome LCD/
7.2I 1 slot 400(W)200(H)70(D)mm F F F F F
MDI Horizontal type 2 slots 400(W)200(H)120(D)mm F F F — —
8.4 color LCD/MDI
8.4I 1 slot 400(W)200(H)70(D)mm F F F — —
Control unit
incorporated Horizontal type 2 slots 400(W)200(H)120(D)mm F F F — —
display unit 7.2 monochrome LCD/
7.2I 1 slot 260(W)300(H)70(D)mm F F F F F
*1 MDI Virtical type 2 slots 260(W)300(H)120(D)mm F F F — —
8.4 color LCD/MDI
8.4I 1 slot 260(W)300(H)70(D)mm F F F — —
Virtical type 2 slots 260(W)300(H)120(D)mm F F F — —
Basic instruction: 5µ sec/step
PMC–SA1 fB fB — f f
PMC Max. step number ladder: 5000
SYSTEM Basic instruction: 0.033µ sec/step
PMC–SB7 fA fA fA — —
Max. step number ladder: 24000
DI/DO;96/64 60(W)380(H)172(D)mm (with MPG I/F) l l l — —
I/O module for machine I/F (with MPG I/F) l l l — —
I/O module for machine I/F (without MPG I/F) l l l — —
Operator’s panel I/O module (with MPG I/F) l l l — —
Operator’s panel I/O module (without MPG I/F) l l l — —
Machine interface (I/O Link)
DI/DO;1024/1024 points Standard operator’s panel l l l — —
Small operator’s panel l l l — —
Connection panel I/O module (DI/DO module,
l l l — —
2A output module, Analog input module)
I/O Unit–MODEL A l l l — —
Additional peripheral axes (I/O Link β servo) l l l — —
14

Item Specifications
MC TC PC MC TC
Others
DI/DO;96/64 60(W)380(H)172(D)mm (with MPG I/F) — — — l l
I/O module for machine I/F (with MPG I/F) — — — l l
I/O module for machine I/F (without MPG I/F) — — — l l
Operator’s panel I/O module (with MPG I/F) — — — l l
Machine interface (I/O Link) Operator’s panel I/O module (without MPG I/F) — — — l l
DI/DO;240/160 points Standard operator’s panel — — — l l
Small operator’s panel — — — l l
Connection panel I/O module (DI/DO module,
— — — l l
2A output module, Analog input module)
Additional peripheral axes (I/O Link β servo 1axis) — — — l l
Manual pulse generator l l l l l
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
F F F — —
Connectable servo motor FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α (HV)is series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series F F F F F
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
F F — — —
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α (HV)i series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi P series
Connectable spindle motor
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi T series F F — — —
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi L series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series F F — F F
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series (PSM,SVM,SPM) F F F — —
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series (SVPM) F F F F F
Connectable servo amplifier
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series (SVM) F F F F F
Analog spindle I/F l l — l l
Position detector unit for full–closed Pulse coder/optical scale (2–phase pulse interface) l l l l l
control (for full–closed control) Pulse coder/optical scale (serial interface) l l l l l
SERVO GUIDE l l l l l
Input power supply 24VDC10% f f f f f
At operating: 0°C to 58°C
Ambient temperature of unit f f f f f
At nonoperating: –20°C to 60°C
Normally: 75%RH or less
(No dew, nor frost allowed)
Ambient relative humidity f f f f f
Short term (within one month): 95%RH or less
(No dew, nor frost allowed)
At operating: 0.5G or less
Vibration f f f f f
At nonoperating: 1G or less
NOTE
*1 : Control unit is incorporated with disply unit.
*2 : The actual registrable value might changes according to the registered number of programs
and the program sizes.
15
II. NC FUNCTION
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION PREFACE
PREFACE
This part describes the functions that can be performed on all models. For
the functions available with each model, see the list of specifications in
Part I.
19
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
1 CONTROLLED AXES
20
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1. CONTROLLED AXES
1.1
NUMBER OF THE ALL
CONTROLLED AXES
0i Mate–TC 0i Mate–MC 0i–TC 0i–MC
Number of controlled axes 3 3 4 4

(including Cs axis)
Number of controlled paths 1 1 1 1
Number of basic controlled axes 2 3 2 3
Number of basic simultaneously 2 3 2 3

controlled axes
Number of controlled 3 3 4 4
axes expanded (all)
Number of simultaneously 3 3 4 4
controlled axes expanded (all)
Axis control by PMC 0 0 4 4
Cs contour control 1 0 1 1
1.2
AXIS NAMES T series :
The two basic axes are always set to X and Z. Additional axes can be
selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, and Y freely.
NOTE
If U, V, or W is used as an axis name, the G code system
must be either B or C.
M series :
The three basic axes are set to X, Y, and Z. Additional axes can be
selected from A, B, C, U, V, and W freely.
21
1.3 There are two increment systems as shown in the tables below. One of the
increment systems can be selected using a parameter.
INCREMENT SYSTEM
NOTE
If IS-C is selected, function “increment system 1/10” is
required.
Table 1.3 (a) IS–B
Least
Least input increment command Abbreviation
increment
0.001 mm (diameter programming) 0.0005 mm

Metric input 0.001 mm (radius programming) 0.001 mm
Millimeter 0.001 deg 0.001 deg

machine 0.0001 inch (diameter programming) 0.0005 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch (radius programming) 0.001 mm
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
IS–B
0.001 mm (diameter programming) 0.00005 inch
Metric input 0.001 mm (radius programming) 0.0001 inch
Inch 0.001 deg 0.001 deg

machine 0.0001 inch (diameter programming) 0.00005 inch
Inch input 0.0001 inch (radius programming) 0.0001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
Table 1.3 (b) IS–C
Least
Least input increment command Abbreviation
increment
0.0001 mm (diameter programming) 0.00005 mm

Metric input 0.0001 mm (radius programming) 0.0001 mm
Millimeter 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

machine 0.00001 inch (diameter programming) 0.00005 mm
Inch input 0.00001 inch (radius programming) 0.0001 mm
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
IS–C
0.0001 mm (diameter programming) 0.000005 inch
Metric input 0.0001 mm (radius programming) 0.00001 inch
Inch 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

machine 0.00001 inch (diameter programming) 0.000005 inch
Inch input 0.00001 inch (radius programming) 0.00001 inch
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
22
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1. CONTROLLED AXES
The least command increment is in millimeters or inches, depending on

the machine tool. One of them must be selected using a parameter
beforehand.
The least input increment can be switched between metric input and inch
input by using a G code (G20 or G21) or a setting parameter.
1.3.1 The following least input increments can be set using a parameter:
Input Unit (10 Times) Increment system Least input increment
IS–B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch
IS–C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 deg
NOTE
The minimum input increment for inch input is not affected.
23
1.4 The following table lists the maximum strokes of machine tools that are
allowed by the control unit:
MAXIMUM STROKE
Maximum stroke = Least command increment 99999999
Increment system Maximum stroke
±99999.999 mm
Millimeter machine
±99999.999 deg
IS–B
±9999.9999 inch
Inch machine
±99999.999 deg
±9999.9999 mm
Millimeter machine
±9999.9999 deg
IS–C
±999.99999 inch
Inch machine
±9999.9999 deg
NOTE
1 The values (in mm or inches) in the table are diameter
values if diameter programming is specified, or radius
values if radius programming is specified.
2 A command that exceeds the maximum stroke is not
allowed.
24
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
2 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
25
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
2.1 The following G codes are provided. The G codes are classified into
three: A, B, and C. One of the G code types can be selected using a
T SERIES parameter. In this manual, G code system B is assumed.
G code list for T series (1/3)

G code
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
00
G08 G08 G08 Advanced preview control
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
01
G34 G34 G34 Variable–lead thread cutting
Automatic tool compensation X (When the bit 3 (G36) of
G36 G36 G36
parameter No. 3405 is set to 0)
G37 G37 G37 00 Automatic tool compensation Z
G37.1 G37.1 G37.1 Automatic tool compensation X
G37.2 G37.2 G37.2 Automatic tool compensation Z
26

G code
Group Function
A B C
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygonal turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygonal turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Traverse direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G72 G72 G73
01 (for grinding machine)
G73 G73 G74 Oscilation grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Oscilation direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G74 G74 G75
(for grinding machine)
27

G code
Group Function
A B C
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Endface turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per rotation feed
* G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
* G91 G91 Incremental programming
* G98 G98 Return to initial level
11
* G99 G99 Return to R point level
28
2.2 The following G codes are provided :

M SERIES
G code list for M series (1/3)
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation

01
G02 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
G05.1 AI contour/AI nano contour/AI advanced preview/smooth interpolation
G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
00
G08 Advanced preview control
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis

G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
G29 00 Automatic return from reference position
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 Skip function
G33 01 Thread cutting
G37 00 Automatic tool length measurment
G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation left

G42 Cutter compensation right
29

G40.1 (G150) Normal direction control cancel mode

G41.1 (G151) 19 Normal direction control left side on
G42.1 (G152) Normal direction control right side on
G43 Tool length compensation + direction
08
G44 Tool length compensation – direction
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel

11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection

G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G60 00/01 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call

G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 Coordinate rotation

16
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel
G73 Peck drilling cycle

09
G74 Counter tapping cycle
30
G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine)

G76 09 Fine boring cycle
G77 Direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G78 01 Continuous–feed surface grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G79 Intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G80 Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel
G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle or external operation function

G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
09
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute command
03
G91 Increment command
G92 Setting for work coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
00
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G94 Feed per minute
05
G95 Feed per rotation
G96 Constant surface speed control
13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 Return to initial point in canned cycle

10
G99 Return to R point in canned cycle
G160 In–feed control function cancel(for grinding machine)
20
G161 In–feed control function(for grinding machine)
31
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
32
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3.1 Positioning is done with each axis separately (Non linear interpolation
type positioning).
POSITIONING (G00) Either of the following tool paths can be selected accroding to bit 1 of
parameter No. 1401.
D Non linear interpolation positioning
The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis
separately. The tool path is normally straight.
D Linear interpolation posioning
The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation (G01). The tool is
positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more
than the rapid traverse rate for each axis.
When the acceleration/deceleration type is changed from the constant
acceleration (inclination) type to the constant time (time constant)
type, the tool can move along a specified path.
Linear interpolation Start position

positioning
Non linear interpolation

End position positioning
It is decelerated, to a stop at the end point, and imposition check is

performed (checks whether the machine has come to the specified
position). The in-position check can be suppressed using a parameter.
Width of imposition can be set as a parameter.
Format
G00 IP _ ;
33
3.2 M series It is always controlled to perform positioning to the end point from a
single direction, for better precision in positioning. If direction from start
SINGLE DIRECTION point to end point is different from the predecided direction, it once
POSITIONING (G60) positions to a point past the end point, and the positioning is reperformed
(M series) for that point to the end point.
Even if the direction from start point to end point is the same as predecided
direction, the tool stops once before the end point.
Exceeded
amount
End point Temporary stop
Format
G60 IP _ ;
34
3.3 Linear interpolation is done with tangential direction feed rate specified
by the F code.
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
X axis
(G01)
End point
(200, 150)
(Program example)
G01 G90 X200. Z150. F200 ;
Start point
Z axis
Format
G01 IP _ F_ ;
F : Feedrate
35
3.4 Circular interpolation of optional angle from 0° to 360 ° can be specified.

G02: Clockwise (CW) circular interpolation
CIRCULAR G03: Counterclockwise (CCW) circular interpolation
INTERPOLATION
(G02, G03) Yp Xp Zp
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02
Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19
Feed rate of the tangential direction takes the speed specified by the F
code. Planes to perform circular interpolation is specified by G17, G18,
G19. Circular interpolation can be performed not only on the X, Y, and
Z axis but also on the parallel axes of the X, Y, and Z axes.
G17: Xp-Yp plane
G18: Zp-Xp plane
G19: Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameter is set to decide which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes to be the
additional axis.
Format
Arc on the Xp-Yp plane
G02 R_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
Arc on the Zp-Xp plane
G02 R_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ F_ ;
G03 K_ I_
Arc on the Yp-Zp plane
G02 R_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
I_. J_, K_:Distance of the X, Y, Z axes from the start point to the center of
the circle
R:Arc radius (For an arc having a central angle of 180° or greater, specify
an R value with a minus sign. A complete circumference cannot be speci-
fied.)
End point End point End point
(x, y) (z, x) (y, z)
Y X Z
X Start Z Start Y Start
i point k point j point
j i k
Center Center Center
36
The following shows the arc radius range that can be specified.
Input increments
Metric input Inch input
Increment IS–B 0.001 to 99999.999mm 0.0001 to 9999.9999inch

system
IS–C 0.0001 to 9999.9999mm 0.00001 to 999.99999inch
37
3.5 Helical interpolation performs circular interpolation of a maximum of

two axes, synchronizing with other optional two axes circular
HELICAL interpolation. Thread cutting of large radius threads or machining of solid
INTERPOLATION cams are possible by moving a tool in a spiral.
(G02, G03) The commanded speed is the speed of the tangential direction of the arc.
Thus, the speed of a linear axis is expressed as follows:
Lengthoflinearaxis
F
Arclength
Tool path
X Y
Tangential speed along an arc by circular interpolation

is the rate specified in programming.
Format
Arc on the Xp-Yp plane
G02 R_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
Arc on the Zp-Xp plane
G02 R_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 K_ I_
Arc on the Yp-Zp plane
G02 R_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
α, β: Optional axis other than the circular interpolation axes
38
3.6 The function in which contour control is done in converting the command
programmed in a cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear
POLAR COORDINATE axis (movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of
INTERPOLATION a workpiece) is the polar coordinate interpolation. It is an effective
(G12.1, G13.1) function when a straight line groove is cut on the outer diameter of a
workpiece or when a cam shaft is ground.
Whether the polar coordinate interpolation is done or not is commanded
by a G code.
These G codes shall be commanded in a single block.
Format
G12.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode

(Polar coordinate interpolation shall be done.)
G13.1; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(Polar coordinate interpolation is not done.)
Explanations
D Polar coordinate The axes (linear axis and rotary axis) on which polar coordinate
interpolation mode interpolation is done are set beforehand by parameters.
(G12.1) Change the mode to polar coordinate interpolation mode by commanding
G12.1, and a plane (hereinafter referred to as polar coordinate
interpolation plane) is selected in which linear axis is made to the first
axis of the plane, and virtual axis being a right angle with the linear axis
is made to the second axis of the plane. Polar coordinate interpolation is
carried out on this plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation made, the command of linear
interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) is possible.
And both absolute command (G90) and incremental command (G91) are
possible.
For the program command it is possible to apply cutter compensation.
For the path after cutter compensation is done, polar coordinate
interpolation can be made.
As for feedrate, specify the tangential speed (relative speed between the
workpiece and the tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(cartesian coordinate system) with F.
D Polar coordinate The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is obtained by G13.1
interpolation cancel command.
mode (G13.1)
39
Examples
D Polar coordinate
interpolation by X axis
(Linear axis) and C axis
(Rotary axis)
C′ (Virtual axis)
C axis Path after cutter

compensation
Programmed path
N204 N203
N205
N200 X axis
N202 N201
Tool
N208
N206 N207 Z axis
(X axis is diameter programming and C axis is radius programming)

00001;
:
N100 G90 G00 X120.0 C0 Z_ ; Positioning to the starting position
N200 G12.1; Starting polar coordinate interpolation
N201 G42 G01 X40.0 F D01;
N202 C10.0;
N203 G03 X20.0 C20.0 R10.0 ;
Contour program
N204 G01 X-40.0 ;
(Program in cartesian coordinate
N205 G-10.0 ; system of X-C′ plane)
N206 G03 X-20.0 C-20.0 I10.0 K0 ;
N207 G01 X40.0 ;
N208 C0 ;
N209 G40 X120.0 ;
N210 G13.1 ; Canceling polar coordinate
N300 Z_ ; interpolation
N400 X_ C_ ;
:
M30 ;
40
3.7 When the form on the expanded side view of a cylinder (from on the
cylinder coordinate system) is commanded by a program command, the
CYLINDRICAL NC converts the form into a linear axis movement and a rotary axis
INTERPOLATION movement then performs a contour control. This feature is called the
(G07.1) cylindrical interpolation.
Cylindrical interpolation is commanded with G07.1.
Format
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) Radius value of cylinder ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0 ;
Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation
Explanations
D Cylindrical interpolation Cylindrical interpolation is made between the rotary axis specified in the
mode block of G07.1 and the other optional linear axis.
Circle interpolation command is allowed as well as linear interpolation,
during cylindrical interpolation mode. Also, absolute command and
incremental command can be made. Cutter compensation can be added
to the program command. Cylindrical interpolation is made for the path
after cutter compensation.
Feed rate gives the tangential speed on the expanded plane of the cylinder
with F.
D Cancellation mode of G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0; Cancellation mode of cylindrical

cylindrical interpolation interpolation is made when commanded as above.
41
Examples
An example of a program C
O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION);
N1 G00 G00 Z100.0 C0;
N2 G01 G18 Z0 C0;
N3 G7.1 C57299; Z R
N4 G01 G42 Z120.0 D10 F250;
N5 G40.0;
N6 G03 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ;
N7 G01 Z70.0;
N8 G02 Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0;
N9 G01 C150.0;
N10 G02 Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0;
N11 G01 Z110.0 C230.0;
N12 G03 Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0;
N13 G01 G360.0;
N14 G40 Z100.0;
N15 G07.1 C0;
N16
M30;
mm
N05 N12 N13
120
110 N06
N11
90
N07
70
N08 N09 N10
60
C
0 30 60 70 150 190 230 270 360 deg
42
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4. THREAD CUTTING
4 THREAD CUTTING
43
4. THREAD CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
4.1 By feeding the tool synchronizing with the spindle rotation, thread
cutting of the specified lead is performed. In addition to straight threads,
EQUAL LEAD taper threads and scroll threads can be cut with equal leads.
THREAD CUTTING
(G33) (WITH G CODE L L
SYSTEM A: G32)
Straight thread
L Taper thread
Scroll thread
Format
G33 IP_ F_ :
F_ : Lead along the long axis
(axis having the largest amount of travel)
Explanations To form a single thread, threading is generally performed several times

from rough machining to finish machining along the same path.
Threading starts when the one-revolution signal from the position coder
attached to the spindle is detected. So threading always starts at the same
point on the circumference of the workpiece, and threading is performed
along the same path on the workpiece. In this case, however, the shaft
must rotate at a constant speed during operations from rough machining
to finish machining. If the spindle speed changes, an accurate thread may
not be produced.
The following shows the specifiable lead range:
D M series Specifiable lead range
Metric input F1 to F50000 (0.01 to 500.00mm)
Inch input F1 to F99999 (0.0001 to 9.9999inch)
D T series Specifiable lead range

Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000mm
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999inch
NOTE
Leads exceeding the maximum cutting feed speed when
converted to per minute feed speed cannot be specified.
44
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4. THREAD CUTTING
4.2 T series
MULTIPLE–THREAD
CUTTING (G33) (T
series)
Multiple–thread screws
Format
Constant–lead threading
G33 IP _ F_ Q_ ;
G33 IP_ Q_ ;
IP _ : End point
F_ : Lead in longitudinal direction
Q_ : Threading start angle
4.3 T series Variable lead thread cutting can be done by commanding long axis
direction lead and lead increase/decrease per spindle rotation.
VARIABLE LEAD
THREAD CUTTING
(G34) (T series)
Format
G34 IP_ F_ K_ :
IP _ : End point
F_ : Long axis direction lead at start point
K_ : Lead increase/decrease per spindle rotation
Command value range of

lead increase/decrease (K) per spindle rotation:
Command value range
Metric input ±0.0001 to ±500.0000 mm/rev
Inch input ±0.000001 to ±9.999999 inch/re
45
4. THREAD CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
4.4 T series Continuous thread cutting in which thread cutting command block is
continuously commanded is available. As it is controlled so that the
CONTINUOUS spindle synchronism shift (occurred when shifting from one block to
THREAD CUTTING (T another) is kept to a minimum, special threads like threads which leads
series) or shape change during the cycle can also be cut.
G33 G33
G33
46
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
5 FEED FUNCTIONS
47
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
5.1 Positioning of each axis is done in rapid motion by the positioning

command (G00).
RAPID TRAVERSE There is no need to program rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set
in the parameter (per axis).
Least command increment Rapid traverse rate range
0.001mm, deg 30 to 240000mm/min, deg/min

0.0001inch 3.0 to 9600.0inch/min
0.00001inch 3.0 to 4000.0inch/min
NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s
interpolation capacity when the high-resolution detection
interface is equipped. When the whole system is
considered, there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, refer to Appendix A.
48
5.2 Feed rates of linear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02,
G03) are commanded with numbers after the F code.
CUTTING FEED RATE
5.2.1 In cutting feed, it is controlled so that speed of the tangential direction is

Tangential Speed always the same commanded speed.
Constant Control
5.2.2 Cutting feed rate upper limit can be set as parameters. If the actual cutting
Cutting Feed Rate feed rate (feed rate with override) is commanded exceeding the upper
limit, it is clamped to a speed not exceeding the upper limit.
Clamp
5.2.3 With the per minute feed mode G94, tool feed rate per minute is directly
Per Minute Feed (G94) commanded by numerical value after F.
Least command increment Cutting feed rate range

0.0001inch 0.01 to 9600.0inch/min
0.00001inch 0.01 to 4000.0inch/min
NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s
interpolation capacity. When the whole system is
considered, there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, see Appendix A.
49
5.2.4 With the per revolution feed mode G95, tool feed rate per revolution of
Per Revolution Feed the spindle is directly commanded by numeral after F. A position coder
must be mounted on the spindle.
(G95) For the T series, however, the feed–per–revolution command can be
enabled by setting the corresponding parameter accordingly, even when
the position coder is not installed (feed per revolution without position
coder).
D M series Least command increment Cutting feed rate range
0.001mm, deg 0.01 to 500.00mm/rev, deg/rev

0.0001inch 0.0001 to 9.9999inch/rev
0.00001inch 0.0001 to 9.9999inch/rev
D T series Least command increment Cutting feed rate range

0.0001inch 0.000001 to 9.999999inch/rev
0.00001inch 0.000001 to 9.999999inch/rev
NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the CNC’s
interpolation capacity. When the whole system is
considered there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, See Appendix A.
5.2.5 M series When a 1-digit number from 1 to 9 is commanded after the F, the preset
One–digit F Code Feed speed corresponding the 1-digit number commanded is set as feed rate.
When F0 is commanded, rapid traverse is set.
(M series) Set the one-digit F code feed rate change input signal on from the machine
side, and rotate the manual pulse generator. Feed rate of the currently
selected speed can be changed.
Feed rate set or changed will be memorized even after power is turned
off.
50
5.3
OVERRIDE
5.3.1 The per minute feed (G94) and per rotation feed (G95) can be overrided
Feed Rate Override by:
0 to 254% (per every 1%).
In inverse time, feed rate converted to per minute feed is overridden. Feed
rate override cannot be performed to F1-digit feed.
Feed rate also cannot be performed to functions as thread cutting and
tapping in which override is inhibited.
5.3.2 Rapid traverse rate can be overridden by:

F0, 25%, 50%, 100%.
Rapid Traverse
F0: A constant speed per axis is set by parameter
Override An override of 0% to 100% can be applied in 1% steps using a signal.
5.3.3 Feed rate override and the second feed rate override can be clamped to
100% by a signal from the machine side.
Override Cancel
5.3.4 The manual continuous feedrate and incremental feed rate can be
overridden by:
Jog Override
0% to 655.34% (in steps of 0.01%)
51
5.4 Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
AUTOMATIC Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feed rate
ACCELERATION/ changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
DECELERATION Rapid traverse : Linear acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Jogging : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Rapid traverse
FR : Rapid traverse
FR TR : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant
0
Time
TR TR
Jog feed
FC : Feed rate
FC TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant
0
Time
TC TC
Feed, Dry run

FJ : Jog feed rate
FJ TJ : Jog feed time
constant
FL : Low feed rate after
deceleration
FL
0
Time
TJ TJ
52
5.5 The function for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration

increases or decreases the rapid traverse feedrate smoothly.
RAPID TRAVERSE This reduces the shock to the machine system due to changing
BELL–SHAPED acceleration when the feedrate is changed.
ACCELERATION/ As compared with linear acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration allows smaller time constants to be set,
DECELERATION
reducing the time required for acceleration/deceleration.
Linear acceleration/deceleration Bell–shaped acceleration/

for rapid traverse deceleration for rapid traverse
Feedrate
Feedrate
0 0
Time Time
Acceleration
Acceleration
0 0
Time Time
53
5.6
LINEAR
ACCELERATION/ Speed
DECELERATION
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION
Time
TC TC
In the linear acceleration/deceleration, the delay for the command caused

by the acceleration/ deceleration becomes 1/2 compared with that in
exponential acceleration/deceleration, substantially reducing the time
required for acceleration and deceleration.
Also, the radius direction error in the circular interpolation caused by the
acceleration/deceleration is substantially reduced.
Z ∆r ∆r: Maximum value of radius

error (mm)
Command
path v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circular radius (mm)
Actual T1 : Acceleration/
path deceleration time
r constant (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo
motor (sec)
The maximum value of error in this radius direction is obtained

approximately by the following equation.
2
Dr + (1 T 1 ) 1 T2 ) Vr
2 2
. . . . . For exponential acceleration/deceleration
2 2
2
Dr + ( 1 T 1 ) 1 T2 ) Vr . . . . . For linear acceleration/deceleration after
2 2
24 2 cutting feed interpolation
Consequently, in case of the linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, if an error caused by the servo loop time constant is
excluded, the radius directional error will be reduced to 1/12, compared
with the exponential acceleration/deceleration.
54
5.7
BELL–SHAPED
Feedrate
ACCELERATION/
B
DECELERATION F
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION F/2 A
0 TC/2 Time
TC TC
As shown above in the quadratic curve, it is possible to accelerate and

decelerate the cutting feedrate.
When the acceleration and deceleration section are connected, the
composed curve shapes just like a hanging bell. That is why this kind of
acceleration/deceleration is called bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration.
Considering a time constant as Tc (time spent to accelerate from feedrate
0 up to commanded feedrate F or time spent to decelerate from
commanded feedrate F down to feedrate 0), feedrate accelerates up to 1/2
of the commanded feedrate (F/2) for 1/2 of the time constant (Tc/2). The
acceleration/deceleration curve 0A shown in the figure above can be
expressed by the following equation :
f (t) + 2F2 t 2
TC
The curve AB and 0A are symmetric with respect to point A.
The feature of this acceleration/deceleration is that the feedrate change is
small near feedrate 0 and the commanded feedrate.
55
5.8 T series Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
ERROR DETECTION Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
(T series)
This part causes the corner of the tool
path to be rounded.
Feedrate
Time
Programmed tool path
Actual tool–center path
If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that

a block not be started until the acceleration/deceleration
of the previous block has been completed.
Feedrate
Time
NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
servo motor, use the in–position check function together
with this function.
After acceleration/
deceleration After servo motor delay
Feedrate
Range od in–position check Time
56
5.9 M series Move command in blocks commanded with G09 decelerates at the end
point, and in–position check is performed. G09 command is not
EXACT STOP (G09) necessary for deceleration at the end point for positioning (G00) and
(M series) in–position check is also done automatically. This function is used when
sharp edges are required for workpiece corners in cutting feed.
Exact stop off
Exact stop on (The in-position

check is performed at the end of
a block.)
5.10 M series When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the
end point and in–position check is performed per block thereafter. This
EXACT STOP MODE G61 is valid till G64 (cutting mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or
(G61) (M series) G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
5.11 M series When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
CUTTING MODE (G64) command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
(M series) override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
5.12 M series When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded
as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
TAPPING MODE (G63) decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. And in-tapping
(M series) signal is issued during tapping operation. This G63 is valid till G61
(exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cutting
mode) is commanded.
5.13 M series When G62 is commanded during cutter compensation, cutting feed rate
is automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time
AUTOMATIC CORNER of the corner is thus controlled not to increase. This G62 is valid till G61
OVERRIDE (G62) (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is
(M series) commanded.
57
5.14 With the G04 command, shifting to the next block can be delayed.
When commanded with a per minute feed mode (G94), shifting to the next
DWELL (G04) block can be delayed for the commanded minutes.
When commanded with a per rotation feed mode (G95), shifting to the
next block can be delayed till the spindle rotates for the commanded
times.
Dwell may always be performed by time irrespective of G94 and G95 by
parameter selection.
Format
Per second dwell
G94 G04 P_ ;
X_
P_ or X_ : Dwell time commanded in seconds (0.001-99999.999 sec)
Per revolution dwell
G95 G04 P_ ;
X_
P_ or X_ : Spindle rotation angle commanded in rev.
(0.001-99999.999 rev)
58
5.15 If rapid traverse blocks are specified successively, or if the block next to
a rapid traverse block does not include any tool movements, the execution
RAPID TRAVERSE of the next block can be started when the feedrate of each axis in the rapid
BLOCK OVERLAP traverse block has decreased to the parameter–set deceleration ratio.
Examples
X–axis feedrate
N1 G00 X– – ; N2 G00 X– – ;
When the function of

overlapping rapid tra-
verse blocks is enabled
Fh When the function of
overlapping rapid tra-
Fd verse blocks is dis-
abled
t
Fh : Rapid traverse feedrate

a : Setting of parameter No.1722 (feedrate reduction ratio)
Fd : Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: Fh x a/100
NOTE
The parameter No.1722 is effective when parameter
No.1601 #4 (RT0) is set to 1.
59
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
6 REFERENCE POSITION
60
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6. REFERENCE POSITION
6.1 Positioning to the reference position can be done by manual operation.

With jogging mode (JOG), manual reference position return (ZRN)
MANUAL signals, and signal for selecting manual reference position return axis (±J1
REFERENCE to ±J8) on, the tool the machine is turned on, it decelerates, and when it
POSITION RETURN is turned off again, it stops at the first grid point, and reference position
return end signal is output. This point is the reference position.
By performing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate
system and the work coordinate system is established.
There is only one method available to perform manual reference point
return:
In the grid method, a certain grid of the position detection is appointed as
the reference position. The reference position position can be shifted by
the grid shift function.
6.2 This function moves the machine to around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
SETTING THE position for the machine in the manual reference position return mode
REFERENCE without the deceleration signal for reference position return. With this
POSITION WITHOUT function, the machine reference position can be set at a given position
DOGS without the deceleration signal for reference position return.
Explanations
D Setting the reference 1 Place the machine in the manual continuous feed mode, and perform
position positioning to a position near but not exceeding the reference position
from reference position return direction (setting by parameter).
2 Enter the manual reference position return mode, then input the feed
axis direction select signal (+) or (–) for the axis.
3 Positioning is made at the grid point located nearest from the current
point to reference position return direction. This point is recorded as
the reference position. If the absolute-position detector is provided,
the set reference position is retained after the power is turned off. In
this case, when the power is turned on again, there is no need for setting
the reference position again.
D Reference position 1 After the reference position is set, when the feed axis select signal (+)
return or (–) is input for the axis in the reference position return mode,
reference position return operation is performed in rapid traverse
regardless of which signal (+) or (–) is input.
61
6.3 M series
AUTOMATIC
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
(G28, G29) (M series)
D Return to reference With the G28 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the
position (G28) reference position via the commanded point. After positioning, the
reference position return end lamp lights. If G28 was commanded when
reference position return is not performed after power on, reference
position return is done in the same sequence as the manual reference
position return.
G28 IP _ ;
IP : Command intermediate point
D Return from reference With the G29 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the point
position (G29) commanded by G29, via the intermediate point commanded by G28.
(M series)
G29 IP _ ;
Reference position
Y
The programmer R
need not calculate a Suppose tool change
concrete movement was performed at R.
value between the
intermediate point
and the reference
position. B
Intermediate
A point
C
Example of use of G28 and G29
62
6.4 This function is used to check whether the reference position return
command was performed correctly.
REFERENCE When G27 is commanded, the commanded axis is positioned to the
POSITION RETURN specified position, reference position return end signal is output if
CHECK (G27) reference position return is performed to the correct position, and alarm
arises it is not positioned correctly to the reference point.
This function is available after power is turned on an reference point
return is performed.
Format
G27 IP _ ;
6.5 With the G30 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the 2nd,
3rd, or the 4th reference position, via the commanded point. 2nd, 3rd, or
2ND, 3RD AND 4TH 4th reference position return end signal is output when positioning ends.
REFERENCE Set the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position position as parameters.
POSITION RETURN This function is available after power is turned on and reference position
return is performed.
(G30)
G29 can be used to return from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (same
as reference position return, G28) (M series only).
This function can be used once reference position return has been
performed after power–on.
Format
P2
G30 P3 IP _ ;
P4
P2, P3, P4: Select from 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference positions.
If not selected, 2nd reference position return is
automatically selected.
63
6.6 For reference position return using the grid method, you can shift the
reference position without having to move the deceleration dog, simply
REFERENCE by setting the amount of shift in a parameter.
POSITION SHIFT The time required to adjust the reference position is thus greatly reduced
because the deceleration dog need not be adjusted.
Direction of reference
LDEC LSFT position return
Deceleration dog
Machine
Grid point zero point
LSFT : Reference position shift
LDEC : Distance the tool moves between the deceleration dog being
turned off and the first grid point encountered subsequently
(grid point when the reference position shift is 0)
(LDEC is displayed on the diagnostic screen.)
6.7 The reference position setting function with mechanical stopper

automates the setting of a reference position by butting the tool against
REFERENCE a mechanical stopper on an axis. This function is provided to eliminate
POSITION SETTING the variations in reference position setting that arise when the procedure
WITH MECHANICAL is performed by different operators, and to minimize the amount of work
involved in making fine adjustments after reference position setting.
STOPPER
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then perform
cycle start. The following operations are performed automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced so that the butting
feedrate is constant. The tool is butted against the mechanical stopper.
Then, the tool is drawn back a parameter–set amount from the
mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, then the tool
is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is drawn back
a parameter–set amount from the mechanical stopper.
3. The point on the axis to which the tool is drawn back is set as the
reference position.
64
6.8 The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference
marks (one–rotation signals) at intervals that change at a constant rate.
LINEAR SCALE WITH By determining the reference mark interval, the corresponding absolute
ABSOLUTE position can be deduced. The CNC makes a small movement along an
ADDRESSING axis to measure the one–rotation signal interval, then calculates the
absolute position. The reference position can be established without
REFERENCE MARKS
performing positioning to the reference position.
Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
mark 1 mark 2 mark 1 mark 2 mark 1
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
10.02 10.04 10.06
20.02
20.00 20.00
Fig. 6.8 Sample linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks
6.9 The linear scale expansion function with absolute addressing reference
marks which is an optional function measures the reference mark interval
LINEAR SCALE automatically to establish a reference position when a G00 command or
EXPANSION a jog–feed movement is specified.
FUNCTION WITH
ABSOLUTE
ADDRESSING
REFERENCE MARKS
65
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
7 COORDINATE SYSTEMS
By teaching the CNC the position the tool is to arrive, the CNC moves
the tool to that position. The position is specified using coordinates on a
certain coordinate system.
There are three types of coordinate systems.
D Machine coordinate system
D Workpiece coordinate system
D Local coordinate system
As necessary, one of the above coordinate systems is used for specifying
coordinates for the target position of the tool.
66
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS
7.1 Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
MACHINE A coordinate system in which the reference point becomes the
COORDINATE parameter-preset coordinate value when manual reference point return is
SYSTEM (G53) performed, is set. With G53 command, the machine coordinate system
is selected and the axis is able to be moved in rapid traverse to the position
expressed by the machine coordinates.
Format
G53 IP _ ;
D High–speed G53 function When the function for overlap between rapid traverse blocks is enabled
between a block containing a machine coordinate system selection
command (G53) and a block containing a positioning (rapid traverse)
command (G00), the rapid traverse command (G00) can be executed
before the tool stops through deceleration at the end of the machine
coordinate system selection command (G53). This can speed up
positioning even when the machine coordinate system selection
command (G53) is used.
Specifying P1 in the G53 block enables the high–speed G53 function.
Format
G53 IP _ P1 ;
G53 : G code for selecting the machine coordinate system (00 group)
IP_ : End point dimension word
P1 : Enables the high–speed G53 function.
67
7.2 A coordinate system in which the zero point is set to a fixed point on the
workpiece, to make programming simple.
WORKPIECE A workpiece coordinate system may be set by using the following
COORDINATE methods:
SYSTEM (1) Using G92 (G50 for T series with G code system A)
(2) Automatic setting
(3) Using G54 to G59
When (1) is used, a workpiece coordinate system is established using the
numeric value programmed after G92.
When (2) is used, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically
established upon a manual reference position return, as specified in a
parameter.
When (3) is used, six workpiece coordinate systems must be set from the
MDI panel in advance. The workpiece coordinate system to be used is
selected by specifying a code selected from G54 to G59.
7.2.1
Setting a Workpiece
Coordinate System
(Using G92)
(with G Code System A:
G50)
Format
(G90) G92 IP _ ;
Examples
D Example 1 By using the above command, a workpiece coordinate system can be set
so that the current tool position is at a specified position.
M series T series
Z X
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
23.0
ÅÅ 375.1
φ128.7
Start
point
Z
X
0 25.2
G92 X25.2 Z23.0 ; Reference position

G92 128.7 Z375.1 ;
(diameter programming)
68
D Example 2 Set the reference position on the tool holder or turret as shown in the figure
below, then specify G92 at the beginning of the program. By specifying
an absolute command in this condition, the reference position is moved
to a specified position. To move the tool tip to a specified position,
compensate the distance between the reference position and the tool tip
by using tool length compensation (for the M system) or tool offset (for
the T system).
M series T series
Reference
position 700.0
ÅÅÅ
1200.0 Start point
ÅÅÅ
= reference
position
φ1200.0
Z
X
0 600.0
G92 600.0 Z1200.0 ; G92 1200.0Z700.0 ;

Setting the start point at a given (diameter programming)
reference position on the tool Setting the start point at a given reference
holder position on the turret
When a new workpiece coordinate system is created by specifying G92,

it is determined so that a given point on the tool has a given coordinate
value. So, there is no need to be concerned with old workpiece coordinate
systems. Particularly when the start point for machining is determined
based on the workpiece, the G92 command is useful. In this case, a desired
coordinate system can newly be created even if an old workpiece
coordinate system is invalid.
D Example 3 A workpiece coordinate system can be shifted by using the following

command:
(Shift of a workpiece When this command is specified, a new coordinate system is created so
coordinate system) that the current coordinate value (x, z) at a given point on the tool (for
(T series) example, the tool tip) becomes (x+u, z+w).
For the x and u values, diameters must be set if diameter programming
is specified, or radii must be set if radius programming is specified.
Format
(G91) G92 X(u) Z(w) ;
With G code system A: G50U(u)W(w);
69
Examples
ÅÅ
ÅÅ 30.56
10.2
ÅÅ
Z
When tool A is switched to tool B, G91 G92 X20.4 Z30.56 (diameter

programming) is specified.
7.2.2 When manual reference position return is performed, a workpiece

coordinate system can be set automatically. This functions as if G92IP__;
Automatic Coordinate
were specified at the reference position.
System Setting
70
7.2.3
Setting a Workpiece
Coordinate System
(Using G54 to G59)
Explanations
D Setting a workpiece Set six coordinate systems specific to the machine in advance. Then,
coordinate system select one of the six coordinate systems by using G54 to G59.
Format
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1

IP _ ; G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59
Set the distance between the machine zero point and the zero point of each
of the six coordinate systems (offset from the workpiece zero point) in
advance.
There are two setting methods.
D Using the MDI
D Using a program (See Section 7.4.)
Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are established properly when return
to the reference position is performed after power is turned on.
Immediately after power is turned on, G54 is selected.
D Shift of workpiece The six workpiece coordinate systems can be shifted by a specified
coordinate systems amount (external offset from the workpiece zero point).
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate 1 coordinate 2 coordinate 3 coordinate 4
(G54) (G55) (G56) (G57)
ZOFS2
ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS1
Workpiece
coordinate 5
(G58)
EXOFS ZOFS5
Machine reference position
Workpiece
coordinate 6
ZOFS6 (G59)
EXOFS : External reference offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece reference position offset value
71
7.2.4
Counter Input in a
Workpiece Coordinate
System
Explanations
D Inputting counter values On the workpiece coordinate system screen, when an axis address is
in a workpiece specified, then the [INP.C.] soft key is pressed, the relative coordinate
coordinate system value for the specified axis is set at the cursor position as workpiece
coordinate system data.
Examples When the cursor is positioned on the X–axis of the offset from the
workpiece zero point (G54) with the following relative coordinates:
[Relative coordinates] [Workpiece coordinate system G54]
X 100.000 X= 0.000 ²Cursor position

Y 200.000 Y= 0.000
Z 300.000 Z= 0.000
(1) Inputting X then [INP.C.] sets X = 100.000.

(2) Inputting Y then [INP.C.] sets X = 200.000.
(3) Inputting Z then [INP.C.] sets X = 300.000.
72
7.3 With G52 commanded, the local coordinate system with the commanded
position as zero point can be set. Once the local coordinate system is set,
LOCAL COORDINATE values specified in subsequent move commands are regarded as
SYSTEM (G52) coordinate values on that coordinate system. Coordinates once set is
valid till a new G52 is commanded. This is used when, for example,
programming of a part of the workpiece becomes easier if there is a zero
point besides the workpiece coordinates’ zero point.
(Local coordinate
system)
IP
Workpiece coordi-
nate system 1 (G54) (Local coordinate
system)
G55 IP
Workpiece G56
zero point off- G57
set value G58 Workpiece coordi-
nate system 6 (G59)
(Machine coordinate system)

Value set by
parameter Zero point of machine coordinate system
Reference position
Format
G52 IP _ ;
Explanations When local coordinate system is set, local coordinate system 1 - 6,

corresponding to workpiece coordinate system 1 - 6 is set. Distance
between zero points are all the same preset value.
If G52 IP0; is commanded, local coordinate system is canceled.
73
7.4 G10 command is used to change workpiece origin offsets.

When G10 is commanded in absolute command (G90), the commanded
WORKPIECE ORIGIN workpiece origin offsets becomes the new workpiece origin offsets, and
OFFSET VALUE when G10 is commanded in incremental command (G91), the currently
CHANGE set workpiece origin offsets plus the commanded workpiece origin
offsets becomes the new workpiece offsets.
(PROGRAMMABLE
DATA INPUT) (G10)
Format
G10 L2 Pp IP _ ;
p : Specification the external workpiece origin offset value

p=1–6 : Specifiration the workpiece origin offset value corresponded
to workpiece coordinate systems 1–6
IP : Workpiece origin offset value
74
7.5 M series Forty-eight workpiece coordinate systems can be added when existing
six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 - G59) are not enough for the
ADDITIONAL operation. Make a command as follows for selection of workpiece
WORKPIECE coordinate system.
COORDINATE
SYSTEMS (M series)
Format
G54.1 Pp IP _ ; or G54 Pp IP _ ;
P: 1-48 or 1–300 Number of the additional workpiece coordinate system
The following are the methods of setting and changing of the workpiece
origin offset value as well as those used for the existing workpiece
coordinate systems of G54 to G59.
D Method via MDI
D Method via program
- G10L20Pp;
- Custom macro
75
7.6 The workpiece coordinate system with its zero position away by the
workpiece zero offset amount from the machine coordinate system zero
WORKPIECE position is set by returning the tool to the reference point by a manual
COORDINATE operation. Also, when the absolute position detector is provided, the
SYSTEM PRESET workpiece coordinate system is automatically set by reading the machine
coordinate value from the detector when power on without performing
(G92.1)
manual reference point return operation. The set workpiece coordinate
may shift by any of the following commands or operation:
D When manual interruption is performed with the manual absolute
signal off
D When the travel command is performed by the machine lock
D When axis travel is performed by the handle interrupt or auto/manual
simultaneous operation
D When operation is performed by mirror image
D When the setting of local coordinate system is performed by the G52
or change of workpiece coordinate system is performed by the G82
The workpiece coordinate system shifted by the above operation can be
preset by the G code instruction or MDI operation the same as
conventional manual reference point return.
Explanations
D Workpiece coordinate The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by commanding the
system preset by G code
command
G92.1 IP 0 ;
IP 0 : The axis address to be preset the workpiece coordinate system

Uncommanded axis is not preset.
D Workpiece coordinate The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by the MDI operation
system preset by MDI with soft keys.
operation
76
7.7 T series When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the
automatic system settingdeviates from the programmed work system,the
WORKPIECE set coordinate system can be shifted.
COORDINATE Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinates system shift
SYSTEM SHIFT (T memory.
series)
X
x X–Z : Coordinate system in programming
x–z : Current set coordinate system with shift amount 0
ÅÅÅ
(coordinate system to be modified by shifting)
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
O
ÅÅÅ z
Shift
Z
O
Set the shift amount from O to O in the work coordinate system shift memory.
Workpiece coordinate system shift
77
7.8 A plane subject to circular interpolation, cutter compensation, coordinate

system rotation, or drilling can be selected by specifying a G code.
PLANE SELECTION
(G17, G18, G19) G code Selected plane Xp Yp Zp
G17 Xp–Yp plane

X axis or an Y axis or an Z axis or an
G18 Zp–Xp plane axis parallel axis parallel axis parallel
to the X axis to the Y axis to the Z axis
G19 Yp–Zp plane
Explanations One of the existing parallel axes is determined by an axis address that
appears in the block for which G17, G18, or G19 is specified.
D Example 1 When X and U, Y and V, and Z and W are parallel to each other,
respectively
G17 X_ Y_ . . . . XY plane
G17 U_ Y_ . . . . UY plane
G18 X_ W_ . . . WX plane
G18 U_ W_ . . . WU plane
D Example 2 Planes remain unchanged in blocks for which G17, G18, or G19 is not
specified.
G18 X_ Z_ . . . . ZX plane
X_ Y_ . . . . Plane not changed (ZX plane)
D Example 3 If G17, G18, or G19 is specified for a block, and no axis address is
specified in that block, the axis addresses for the basic three axes are
assumed to be omitted.
G17 . . . . . . . . . . XY plane
G17 X_ . . . . . . . . XY plane
G17 U_ . . . . . . . . UY plane
NOTE
A parameter is used to specify which axis, X, Y, or Z the
additional axis is parallel to. The move command functions
regardless of the plane selection.
For example, suppose that the following is specified:
G17 Z_ ;
Axis Z does not exist on the XpYp plane. The XY plane is
just selected, and the Z axis is moved regardless of the
plane.
78
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION DIMENSION
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION
79
DIMENSION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
8.1 There are two ways to command travels to the axes; the absolute
command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command,
ABSOLUTE AND coordinate value of the end point is programmed; in the incremental
INCREMENTAL command, move distance of the axis itself is programmed.
PROGRAMMING G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command.
G90 : Absolute command
(G90, G91)
G91 : Incremental command
Y
End point
70.0
30.0 Start point
40.0 100.0
For the above figure, incremental command programming results in:

G91 X–60.0 Y40.0 ;
while absolute command programming results in:
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ;
Absolute/incremental command, when G code system A at T series is
selected, is not distinguished by G90/G91 but is distinguished by the
address word.
For the A and B axes, no incremental commands are provided.
Absolute command Incremental command Notes
X U X axis move command
Z W Z axis move command
Y V Y axis move command
C H C axis move command
A None A axis move command
B None B axis move command
Example
X_ W_ ;
Incremental command (Z axis move command)

Absolute command (X axis move command)
80
8.2 M series The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radius
and angle). Use G15, G16 for polar coordinates command.
POLAR COORDINATE
COMMAND (G15, G16) G15 : Polar coordinate system command cancel
(M series) G16 : Polar coordinate system command
Plane selection of the polar coordinates is done same as plane selection

in circular interpolation, using G17, G18, G19.
Command radius in the first axis of the selected plane, and angle in the
second axis. For example, when the X-Y plane is selected, command
radius with address X, and angle with address Y. The plus direction of the
angle is counter clockwise direction of the selected plane first axis +
direction, and the minus direction the clockwise direction.
Both radius and angle can be commanded in either absolute or
incremental command (G90, G91).
The center of the polar coordinates is the zero point of the workpiece
coordinates. (However, if the local coordinates are set, it is the zero point
of the local coordinates.)
Examples D Both hole cycle

N1 G17 G90 G16;
Polar coordinates command, X-Y plane
N2 G81 X100. Y30. Z-20. R-5. F200.;
100mm radius, 30_ angle
N3 X100. Y150;
N4 X100. Y270;
N5 G15 G80;
Polar coordinates cancel
Workpiece coordinate system
150°
30°
270° X
100mm
81
DIMENSION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
8.3 Conversion of inch and metric input can be commanded by the G code
command.
INCH/METRIC G20 : Inch input
CONVERSION G21 : Metric input
(G20, G21) Whether the output is in inch system or metric system is parameter-set
when the machine is installed.
Command G20, G21 at the head of the program. (This specification must
be performed at the reference position.)
Inch/metric conversation can also be done by MDI setting.
The contents of setting data differs depending on whether G20 or G21 is
commanded.
8.4 Numerals can be input with decimal points. Decimal points can be used
basically in numerals with units of distance, speed, and angle. The
DECIMAL POINT position of the decimal point is at the mm, inch, deg position.
INPUT/POCKET There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator–type notation
CALCULATOR TYPE and standard notation.
When calculator–type decimal notation is used, a value without decimal
DECIMAL POINT
point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inch or deg. When
INPUT standard decimal notation is used, such a value is considered to be
specified in least input increments.
Use parameters to select input method; whether to input by pocket
calculator type input, or by the usual decimal point input.
Values can be specified both with and without decimal point in a single
program.
Pocket calculator type
Usual decimal point
Program command decimal point
programming
programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm

Command value without Unit : mm Unit : Least input incre-
decimal point ment (0.001 mm)
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm

Command value with Unit : mm Unit : mm
decimal point
82
8.5 T series Since the work cross section is usually circular in latches, its dimensions
can be specified in two ways when performing a thing:
DIAMETER AND
RADIUS When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming, and
when the radius is specified, it is called radius programming.
PROGRAMMING (T The diameter programming or radius programming can be selected by
series) parameter for each axis.
X axis
A
B R2
R1 Z axis
D1 D2
D1, D2 Diameter programming

R1, R2 Radius programming
8.6 A linear axis refers to an axis moving linearly, and for it values are
specified in mm or inches.
LINEAR AXIS AND A rotation axis refers to a rotating axis, and for it values are specified in
ROTATION AXIS degrees.
For rotation axes, note the following:
D Inch-metric switching is not performed.

D The machine coordinate system is always normalized to the range
from 0deg to 360deg.
8.7 The rotation axis roll-over function rounds the absolute coordinate value
and relative coordinate value of a rotation axis to a coordinate value
ROTARY AXIS within one rotation. This prevents coordinate values to overflow.
ROLL-OVER In an incremental command, the specified value is regarded as the amount
FUNCTION of travel.
In an absolute command, the specified value is rounded to within one
rotation. The resulting coordinate value is used as the end point. A
parameter is used to specify whether to determine the move direction by
the sign of the specified value or by the move distance (the shortest move
distance to the end point is selected).
83
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS
84
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS
9.1 Specify the spindle speed with up to five digits immediately after address
S. The 5-digit numeric value is output to the PMC as a 32-bit binary code.
S CODE OUTPUT The code is maintained until another S is specified. The maximum
number of input digits for S can be specified using a parameter.
9.2 The speed of the analog interface spindle is controlled. Specify the spindle
speed with up to five digits immediately after address S. According to the
SPINDLE SPEED specified spindle speed, a speed command is output to the spindle motor
ANALOG OUTPUT in a form of analog voltage. During constant surface speed control, an
(S ANALOG OUTPUT) analog voltage is output so that it matches the spindle speed reached after
constant surface speed control.
9.3 The speed of the serial interface spindle is controlled.

Specify the spindle speed with up to five digits immediately after address
SPINDLE SPEED S. A speed command is output to the spindle motor according to the
SERIAL OUTPUT specified spindle speed. During constant surface speed control, a speed
(S SERIAL OUTPUT) command is output so that it matches the spindle speed reached after
constant surface speed control.
9.4 If a speed command for the spindle motor is input in a form of [sign +
12-bit binary code], the command is output to the spindle motor according
SPINDLE OUTPUT to the input.
CONTROL BY THE
PMC
85
9.5 Whether to perform constant surface speed control is specified using G96
or G97.
CONSTANT SURFACE G96 : Constant surface speed control mode
SPEED CONTROL G97 : Constant surface speed control cancel mode
If the surface speed is specified with an S code (S followed by a numeric
value) in the constant surface speed control mode, the spindle speed is
controlled so that a constant surface speed can be maintained while the
tool position is changing.
The axis on which the calculation for constant surface speed control is
based can be specified with either a parameter or the following command:
G96 Pα ; P0 : Axis specified with a parameter
Pα : αth axis (α = 1 to 8)
The specifiable range of the S code is as follows:
1 to 99999 m/min or feet/min
In the constant surface speed control cancel mode, the spindle speed is
specified using an S code.
In the constant surface speed control mode, a constant surface speed
control on signal is output.
By specifying the following command, the maximum spindle speed can
be set:
G50 S_ ; (with the G code system A in T series)
or
G92 S_ ; (where, S-- is the maximum spindle speed in min–1)
The spindle speed is clamped when it reaches the specified maximum
spindle speed.
A machine that does not have (or which does not use) a position coder
cannot perform feed per rotation under constant surface speed control.
9.6 To the spindle speed specified by S, an override from 0% to 254% can be

applied (in steps of 1%).
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
9.7 T series Actual spindle speed calculated by the return pulses of the position coder
on the spindle is output in 16-bit binary code.
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT (T
series)
86
9.8 T series In turning operation, the spindle connected to the spindle motor rotates
at a certain speed, and the workpiece attached to the spindle is then turned.
SPINDLE The spindle positioning function moves the spindle connected to the
POSITIONING (T spindle motor by a given angle so that the workpiece attached to the
series) spindle is positioned at a desired angle.
With this function, any portion of the workpiece can be drilled.
The spindle position is detected by the position corder attached to the
spindle.
Whether to use the spindle for spindle positioning (spindle positioning
mode) or to use the spindle for spindle rotation (spindle rotation mode)
is command by special M code (set by parameters).
D Move command
When commanded:
G00 C_ ;,
The spindle is positioned to the commanded position by rapid
traverse. Absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) command, as well
as decimal point input is possible.
D Increment system
Least input increment: 0.001 deg.
Detection unit: (360×N)/4096 deg.
N: Combination ratio of position coder and spindle (N=1, 2, 4)
87
9.9 This function monitor spindle speed, detects a higher level of fluctuation
than the commanded speed and signals an abnormality, if any, to the
SPINDLE SPEED machine side, using an alarm, thereby preventing the spindle from
FLUCTUATION seizure, for example. Whether the spindle speed fluctuation detection is
DETECTION done or not is specified by G code.
G25 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is off.
(G25, G26)
G26 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is on.
Format
G26 P_ Q_ R_ ;
P_ : Time from the change of spindle speed to the start of the spindle
speed fluctuation detection (Unit: msec)
Q_ : The ratio of spindle speed to the specified spindle speed
where spindle speed fluctuation detection starts (Unit: %)
R_ : Fluctuation ratio regarded as an alarm (Unit: %)
NOTE
1 The value of P, Q, and R remains after the power off.
2 The actual spindle speed is calculated by the return pulses
generated from the position coder attached to the spindle.
Explanations There are two ways in generating an alarm:

An alarm is generated before the specified spindle speed reaches.
An alarm is generated after the specified spindle speed reaches.
88
D When an alarm is
generated after the
spindle speed becomes Spindle
the commanded speed. speed
r
d
q Specified
q d speed
r
Actual
speed
NO
CHECK CHECK CHECK
Time
Specify Check Alarm
different start
speed
Commanded speed : (Speed commanded by S) x (Spindle override)

Actual speed : Speed detected by position coder
q : (Allowable rate for starting checkup) x (Commanded speed)
r : (Fluctuation rate in which an alarm is given) x (Commanded speed)
d : Fluctuation width in which an alarm is given Cutting by parameter
D When an alarm is
generated before the
spindle speed becomes Spindle
the commanded speed. speed
r
q d Specified
q d speed
r
Actual
speed
NO
CHECK CHECK CHECK
Time
Specify Check Alarm
different start
speed
p : Time between changes in commanded speed and check start.
89
9.10 The serial interface spindle permits positioning and linear interpolation
with another servo axis. Thus, linear interpolation between the spindle
Cs CONTOUR and a servo axis can be specified.
CONTROL
Explanations
D Control mode The serial interface spindle has two modes.
- The spindle rotation control mode controls the speed of the spindle.
(The spindle is rotated according to a speed command.)
- The spindle contour control mode (also called Cs contour control)
controls the position of the spindle. (The spindle is rotated according
to a move command.)
These modes are switched by a signal sent from the PMC.
D Spindle contour control The axis subject to spindle contour control is placed as one of the CNC
axis control axes. Any of the control axes can be selected as the spindle contour
control axis.
D Move command In manual and automatic operation, a move command for the spindle
contour control axis is programmed in the same way as for a servo axis.
Example) Let the name of the spindle contour control axis be C.
G00 C30.0 ; (Positioning)
G01 X100.0 Y100.0 C90.0 F1000.0 ; (Linear interpolation)
D Automatic loop gain - Switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control
setting when switching If there is a difference in servo loop gain between the axis subject to
between spindle rotation spindle contour control and the other servo axes, linear interpolation
control and spindle with the spindle contour control axis cannot be performed properly.
contour control is made As soon as spindle rotation control is switched to spindle contour
control, an appropriate spindle contour control servo loop gain for a
selected gear is automatically set for a necessary servo axis. The axis
for which the servo loop gain is to be changed, and the spindle contour
control servo loop gain for this axis must be set in parameters for each
gear beforehand.
- Switching from spindle contour control to spindle rotation control
As soon as spindle contour control is switched to spindle rotation
control, the original servo loop gain is set for the servo axis
automatically.
90
9.11 Up to two spindles can be controlled. The three spindles are called the first
and second spindles. The first and second spindles are made up of serial
MULTI–SPINDLE interface spindles, and the third spindle is of an analog interface spindle.
CONTROL (However, the second and third spindles must be selected.)
A spindle speed is specified with a 5-digit numeric value following S.
This command functions on the spindle selected by spindle selection
signals (SWS1 to SWS3). More than one spindle can be selected so that
they can be rotated at the same time by specifying the same command.
Each spindle holds a specified command (spindle speed). When the
spindle is not selected by the spindle selection signal, the spindle rotates
at the held spindle speed. By using this feature, the spindles can be rotated
at different speeds at the same time. For each spindle, a signal to stop
spindle rotation is provided (*SSTP1 to *SSTP3). With these signals,
unnecessary spindles can be placed in the stopped state.
Feedback pulses from the position coders connected to the first and
second spindles can be input to the CNC to perform threading and feed
per rotation. One of the position coders connected to the first and second
spindles is selected by a signal. The feedback pulse from the selected
coder is then input to the CNC. From the third spindle, no feedback pulse
can be input.
The multi–spindle control functions of the M and T series differ as
follows:
D For the M series, multi–spindle control is possible only when spindle
gear selection type T is specified.
D For the M series, rigid tapping spindle selection signals (RGTSP1,
RGTSP2, and RGTSP3) cannot be used.
SWS1
*SSTP1 1st Position
Hold spindle coder
SWS2
*SSTP2 2nd Position
Hold spindle coder
S
command
SWS3 *SSTP3
3rd
Hold (Analog spindle)
spindle
* The second and third spindles must be selected.
91
9.12 In machine tools having two spindles (such as a lathe), the speeds of the
two spindles sometimes have to match. This requires when a workpiece
SPINDLE held on the first spindle is transferred to the second spindle while the
SYNCHRONOUS spindles are rotating, and when acceleration/deceleration is performed
CONTROL while a workpiece is being held by the first and second spindles.
When a workpiece having a different figure is transferred between the
spindles, the rotation phases (rotation angles) of the spindles must also
match.
The serial interface spindle synchronous control function is provided to
provide synchronous control for two spindles.
9.13 You can perform spindle orientation simply by mounting a position coder
on the spindle. Stoppers or pins for physically stopping the spindle at a
SPINDLE specified position are not necessary. A spindle can be instantly oriented,
ORIENTATION even when rotating at high speed, thereby greatly reducing the orientation
time.
9.14 Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low
speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle
SPINDLE OUTPUT motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output
SWITCHING characteristics over a wide range.
92
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
93
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
10.1
T CODE OUTPUT
M series A tool can be selected by specifying a tool number of up to eight digits
immediately after address T. The tool number is output to the PMC in a
32-bit binary code. This code is kept till the next T code is commanded.
Maximum input digits are set by parameters.
T series A tool and offset can be selected by specifying a tool number and offset
number of up to eight digits (in total) immediately after address T. The
offset number is specified with the last one or two digits of the T code.
The tool number is specified with the remaining digits after excluding the
one or two digits used to specify the offset number.
When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:
T fffffffl
Offset number
Tool number
When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:
T ffffffll
Offset number
Tool number
The tool number is output in a 32-bit binary code. This code is kept till
the next T code is commanded. Maximum input digits are set by
parameters.
94
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.2
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT
10.2.1
Tool Life Management
Tools are classified into groups, and tool life (hours and times of use) is
set for each group. When use of the tool exceeds the preset hours or times
of use, another tool in the same group which has not yet exceeded the
preset life time is selected. If all the tool in a group exceeds the preset
life time, a signal is output to inform the operator that the tools must be
changed to new tools. With setting the cutter radius compensation
number and the tool length compensation number of the tools,
compensation corresponding to each tool can also be done. (M series)
With use of this function Factory Automation (FA) comes to a reach.
This function has the following features:
D Tool life can be set in hours or times of use.
D New tool select signal output
This signal is output when a new tool is selected in a group. This can
also be used for automatic measurement in compensations of the new
tools.
D Tool change signal
When all the tools of a group has exceeded their life time, this signal
is output to inform the operator.
D Tool skip signal
By inputting this signal, tools still not exceeding their life time, can
also be changed.
D Tool life management data is display/modification
Tool life management data is displayed on the cRT screen, informing
the operator of the condition of the tools at a single view. If necessary,
the counter value of tool life can be modified via the MDI panel.
Number of groups and number of tools per group is selected by
parameter from the following.
M series T series
Number of Number of
Number of tools Number of tools
groups groups
16 16 16 16
32 8 32 8
64 4 64 4
128 2 _____ _____
95
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
10.2.2 M series The following features are added to the tool life management function for
Extended Tool Life easier handling:
Management (M series) D Setting tool life management data for each tool group by program
Addition, modification, and deletion can be made to only the tool life
management data of a specified group; the tool life management data
of the other groups is left intact.
A tool life is set for each tool group by time or use count.
D Displaying and editing tool life management data
All tool life management data is displayed on the screen, and so the
user can understand the current tool state instantly. The following data
items are displayed:
- Tool group number of the tool currently used
- Tool group number selected next
- Tool life Life, life counter value
management List of tool numbers in the group
data Cutter compensation number and tool
length compensation corresponding to
each tool number
Use state for each tool (for example,
indicating whether tool life is reached)
Tool life management data can be modified at the MDI panel. In
addition, tool numbers can be added, changed, and deleted.
D Life count override
If a tool life is set by time, actual time obtained by multiplying the use
time of a tool by a magnification (override value) can be added to the
life counter. An override value from 0 to 99.9 is specified in steps of
0.1 by a signal sent from the PMC.
Example)
If the override value is 0.1, and the use time of a tool is ten minutes,
the life counter is incremented by one minute.
D Tool life notice signal
When the rest of the tool life (remainder value) until a new tool is
selected is set as a value common to all groups, a signal is output to
the PMC when the value obtained by the subtraction (the life value
(LIFE) minus the counter value (COUNT)) has reached the set
remainder value.
96
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
11 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
97
11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
11.1 When up to eight digits immediately after address M are specified, a

32–bit binary code is output. The maximum number of input digits can
AUXILIARY be specified with a parameter. This binary code is used for on/off control
FUNCTIONS of the machine. A block can usually contain up to three M codes although
only one of them is effective.
The following M codes are used for special purposes:
M00 : Program stop
M01 : Optional stop
M02 : End of program
M30 : End of program and tape rewind
The above M codes can also be output in binary codes.
M98 (sub program call) and M99 (return from sub program) and always
processed in the CNC so, signal will not be output.
11.2 Up to three M codes can be simultaneously specified in one block.

As these M codes are simultaneously sent to PMC side, the machining
1–BLOCK PLURAL M cycle time compared with the conventional 1-block single M command
COMMAND is reduced.
Example)
(i) 1-block single M command
M40;
M50;
M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
(ii) 1-block plural M command
M40M50M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
NOTE
1 The maximum input value of the first M code is 99999999,
while the maximum input values of the second and third M
codes are 65535.
2 A strobe signal is provided for each of the first to third M
codes (MF, MF2, and MF3).
When all the operations for the first to third M codes are
completed, completion signal FIN is output.
11.3 When an 8-digit number after address B is commanded, a 32-bit binary

code is output to the PMC. This code is kept till the next B code is
SECOND AUXILIARY commanded.
FUNCTIONS
98
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
11.4 The communication of execution command signal (strobe signal) and

completion signal is the M/S/T/B function were simplified to realize a
HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B high-speed execution of M/S/T/B function.
INTERFACE The time required for cutting can be minimized by speeding up the
execution time of M/S/T/B function.
The following describes an example of auxiliary function M code
command. The same applies to the T, S, and B (second auxiliary function)
functions.
When an M code is specified, the CNC inverts the logical level of strobe
signal MF. Thus, when the signal is 0, it becomes 1. When it is 1, it
becomes 0. After inverting strobe signal MF, the CNC assumes the
completion of PMC operation once the logical level of completion signal
MFIN from PMC has become the same as the logical level of strobe signal
MF.
In the usual system, if the leading edge (from “0” to “1”) of the completion
signal FIN of M/S/T/B is received and then the trailing edge (from “1” to
“0”) of the signal FIN is received, it is considered that the operation has
been completed. However, in this system, the operation is considered to
have been completed by a single change of completion signal MFIN.
Example) M10;
M20;
High-speed System Time Chart
M10 M20
M command Mxx
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
Operation at PMC side
M function completion
signal MFIN
Conventional System Time Chart
M10 M20
M command Mxx
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
Operation at PMC side
Completion signal MFIN
99
11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
NOTE
1 Either the conventional system or the high-speed system
can be selected for communication of strobe signal and
completion signal.
2 In the conventional system, only one completion signal is
available for all functions of M/S/T/B. However, in the high-
speed system, one completion signal is available for each
of M/S/T/B functions.
100
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
12 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
101
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
12.1 A program number is given to each program to distinguish a program

from other programs. The program number is given at the head of each
PROGRAM NUMBER program, with a 4-digit number after the address O.
Program number of the program currently under execution is always
displayed on the CRT screen. Even during the execution of a sub
program, the program number of the main program can also be displayed
by parameter setting. Program search of programs registered in the
memory is done with the program number. The program number can be
used in various ways.
12.2 A program name can be given to the program to distinguish the program
from other programs when displaying all the registered program on a
PROGRAM NAME screen. Register the name between the control-out and the control-in.
Any codes usable in the CNC can be used for the program name.
The program name is displayed with the program number in the directory
display of registered programs. Note that the program name displayed is
within 31 characters.
Example) 01234 (PROGRAM FOR ATC);
12.3 A program is divided into the main program and the sub program. The
CNC normally operates according to the main program, but when a
MAIN PROGRAM command calling a sub program is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the sub program. When a command indicating to
return to the main program is encountered in the sub program, control is
returned to the main program.
102
12.4 When there are fixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns in a

program, programming can be simplified by entering these pattern as sub
SUB PROGRAM programs to the memory. Sub program is called by M98, and M99
commands return from the sub program. The sub program can be nested
4 folds.
A sequence number in a sub program can also be specified for sub
program call.
Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program Sub program
O0001 ; O1000 ; O2000 ; O3000 ; O4000 ;
M98P1000 ; M98P2000 ; M98P3000 ; M98P4000 ;
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

1-loop nesting 2-loop nesting 3-loop nesting 4-loop nesting
Format
Sub program call

M98 P fff ffff Q fffff ;
Number of repetitive Subprogram number Sequence number

calls
If the number of repetitive calls is omitted, 1 is assumed.

When Q and a sequence number are omitted, the beginning of
the sub program is called.
Return from sub program
M99 ;
103
12.5 When memory is used, a program cataloged in the floppy cassette can be
called and executed as a sub program.
EXTERNAL MEMORY A sub program is called from the floppy cassette when the program using
AND SUB PROGRAM the memory executes the following block.
CALLING FUNCTION
Format
Sub program calling
M198 P fff ffff ;
Number of repetitive Subprogram number or file number

calls
If the number of repetitive calls is omitted, 1 is assumed.
NOTE
1 Whether address P specifies the file number or program
number is selected by a parameter.
2 In the program called by M198, no more sub program can
be called by M198.
12.6 Sequence number can be given in a 5-digit number after the address N at
the head of the program block.
SEQUENCE NUMBER The sequence number of the program under execution is always displayed
on the screen. The sequence number can also be searched in the program
by the sequence number search function.
12.7 Either the EIA or the ISO code can be used as tape code. The input
program code is distinguished with the first end of block code (EIA: CR,
TAPE CODES ISO: LF). See the List of Tape Codes for tape codes used.
104
12.8 The following table shows the basic addresses and the range of values to
be specified. The range, however, is that of CNC. Note that the range of
BASIC ADDRESSES the machine is different from this.
AND COMMAND
VALUE RANGE
D Basic Addresses and Function Address Metric input Inch input
Range of Values to Be
Specified (M series) Program number O (Note1) 1–9999 1–9999
Sequence number N 1–99999 1–99999
Preparatory function G 0–999 0–999
±99999.999mm ±9999.9999inch (Note2)

IS–B X, Y, Z, Q,
±99999.999deg ±99999.999deg
Dimension R, I, J, K,
word A, B, C, U,
±99999.9999mm ±999.99999inch (Note2)
IS–C V, W
±99999.9999deg ±9999.9999deg
IS–B 1–240000mm/min 0.01–9600.00inch/min

Feed per min-
F
ute
IS–C 1–100000mm/min 0.01–4000.00inch/min
Feed per rotation,

F 0.01–500.00mm/rev 0.0001–9.9999inch/rev
Setting unit
Spindle function S 0–20000 0–20000
Tool function T 0–99999999 0–99999999
M 0–99999999 0–99999999
Miscellaneous func-
tion
B 0–99999999 0–99999999
0–99999.999 0–99999.999
IS–B
(sec or rev) (sec or rev)
Dwell X, P
0–9999.9999 0–9999.9999
IS–C
Program number
P 1–9999 1–9999
specification
Number of subpro-
P 1–999 1–999
gram repetitions
Offset number H, D 0–400 0–400
105
D Basic Addresses and Function Address Metric input Inch input

Range of Values to Be
Specified (T series) Program number O (Note1) 1–9999 1–9999
Sequence number N 1–99999 1–99999
Preparatory
G 0–999 0–999
function
±99999.999mm ±9999.9999inch (Note2)

IS–B
X, Y, Z, U, ±9999.9999deg ±99999.999deg
Dimension
V, W, A, B,
word
C, I, J, K, R ±99999.9999mm ±999.99999inch (Note2)
IS–C
±99999.9999deg ±9999.9999deg
IS–B 1–240000mm/min 0.01–9600.00inch/min

Feed per min-
F
ute
IS–C 1–100000mm/min 0.01–4000.00inch/min
Feed per rotation, 0.0001–500.00 0.000001–9.999999

F
Screw lead mm/rev inch/rev
Spindle function S 0–20000 0–20000
Tool function T 0–99999999 0–99999999
M 0–99999999 0–99999999
Miscellaneous func-
tion
B 0–99999999 0–99999999
0–99999.999 0–99999.999
IS–B
Dwell P, X, U
0–9999.9999 0–9999.9999
IS–C
Program number
P 1–9999 1–9999
specification
Number of subpro-
P 1–999 1–999
gram repetitions
Sequence number
P, Q 1–99999 1–99999
specification
NOTE
1 “:” can be used for 0 in ISO Code.
2 Coordinates maximum command value for inch input/metric
output is limited to: ±3937.0078 inch (IS–B)/ ±393.70078
inch (IS–C).
106
12.9 The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as
tape format. See List of Tape Format in Appendix C for details on tape
TAPE FORMAT formats.
12.10 Label skip function is valid in the following cases, and “LSK” is
displayed on the screen.
LABEL SKIP D When power is put on.
D When the NC is reset.
When label skip function is in valid, all codes to the first encountered end
of block (EOB) code are ignored.
The ignored part is called “Reader part”, and section after the first end of
block (EOB) code, “significant information”.
12.11 Information between the control-in and the control-out are regarded as
notes and are ignored.
CONTROL-IN/ The reset codes (ISO code: %, EIA code: ER) cannot be used in this part.
CONTROL-OUT The ignored part is called “Notes”.
ISO code EIA code
Control–out ( Channel 2–4–5 on
Control–in ) Channel 2–4–7 on
12.12 When a slash and number ( /n) is programmed at the head of a program,
and when the machine is operated with the optional block skip switch n
OPTIONAL BLOCK on the machine operator’s panel on, information in the block commanded
SKIP with the /n corresponding to the switch number n is ignored.
If the optional block skip switch n is turned off, information in the /n
commanded block will not be ignored. The block with /n commanded can
be skipped by the operator’s selection.
I can be used for n. The 1 to /1 can be omitted.
Example) /1 N12345 G00 X100.Z200.;
12.13 2 to 9 can also be used for the n of the /n.

ADDITIONAL
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
12.14 A parity check is made on the number of punch holes for each input tape
character. If the parity does not match, an alarm occurs (TH check). A
TAPE HORIZONTAL parity check is made on each input data block. If the number of characters
(TH) PARITY CHECK in one block (from the code next to EOB to another EOB) is odd, an alarm
AND TAPE VERTICAL occurs (TV check). The TH or TV check cannot be made on the area
skipped by the label skip function. The TH check is not made on the
(TV) PARITY CHECK
command field.A parameter can be used to specify whether the characters
constituting comments are to be counted when obtaining the number of
characters for TV check. The TV check function is validated or
invalidated according to the value set on the MDI panel.
107
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
13 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
108
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING
13.1 M series Canned cycle is a function to simplify commands for machining (boring,
drilling, or tapping, etc. The canned cycle has the positioning plane and
CANNED CYCLES the drilling axis. The positioning plane is specified with the plane
(G73, G74, G76, selection of G17, G18, and G19. The drilling axis is the basic axis X, Y
G80-G89, G98, G99) or Z (that does not compose the positioning plane) or its parallel axis.
(M series) G code Positioning plane Drilling axis
G17 Xp–Yp plane Xp
G18 Zp–Xp plane Yp
G19 Yp–Zp plane Zp
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis

Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis
The drilling axis address commanded in the same block as the G codes,
G73 - G89, decides whether the drilling axis is the basic axis or its parallel
axis. If the drilling axis address was not commanded, the basic axis
becomes the drilling axis.
Axis other than the drilling axis becomes the positioning axis.
Example)
When U, V, W axes are set as parallel axes for X, Y, Z axes respectively.
G17G81 . . . . Z_ ; Drilling axis is Z axis.
G17G81 . . . . W_ ; Drilling axis is W axis.
G18G81 . . . . Y_ ; Drilling axis is Y axis.
G18G81 . . . . V_ ; Drilling axis is V axis.
G19G81 . . . . X_ ; Drilling axis is X axis.
G19G81 . . . . U_ ; Drilling axis is U axis.
It is not always necessary to command G17, G18, G19 in the same
block as G73 - G89.
NOTE
Z axis can always be appointed the drilling axis by
parameter setting.
Positioning can be commanded with optional axes other than the drilling
axis. The drilling cycle starts after the positioning.
The following explanations are done on the XY plane, and Z axis as the
drilling axis.
The following 13 types of canned cycles are available.
109
13 types of canned cycles (1/4)
Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode
Initial level
R point
R point R point level
G73 q d q d High–speed
peck drilling
cycle
q q (Note 1)
d d
q q
Z point Z point
Initial level
Spindle
CCW
Spindle P
Counter
G74 CCW tapping cycle
R point R point R point level
P
Z point
P Z point
P
Spindle CW
Spindle CW
Spindle
CW
Initial
level
Spindle CW
G76 R point R point R point FIne boring
level cycle
P P
OSS Z point OSS q Position
q Z
110
Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode
Initial level
Drilling cycle
G81 (Spot drilling)
R point
Positon R R point level
Z point Z point
Initial level
Drilling cycle
G82 R point (Counter
R point R point level boring)
P Z point P Z point
Initial level
R point
R point R point level
G83 Peck drilling
q d q d cycle
(Note 1)
q d q d
q q
Z point Z point
Initial level
R point R point
G83 Small hole

q q
pock drilling
d d cycle
d d
Over–load torque d Over–load torque d

Dwell Z point Dwell Z point
111
Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode
Initial level
Spindle CW
Spindle CW P Tapping cycle
G84 P
Positon R Positon R R point
level
Z point Z point
P P
Spindle CCW Spindle CCW
Initial level
Boring cycle
G85
R point
Positon R Positon R level
Z point Z point
Spindle CW
Initial level
Spindle CW
G86 R point Boring cycle

Positon R Positon R
level
Z point Z point
Spindle stop Spindle stop
q
OSS
Spindle CW
G87 Not used Back boring
OSS cycle
Z point
P
Spindle CW
R point
112
Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode
Spindle CW
Initial level
Spindle CW Boring cycle
G88
R point R point
level
Z point Z point
P P Dwell
Dwell
Spindle stop Spindle stop
Initial level
Boring cycle
G89
R point R point R point
level
Z point Z point
P P
Cutting feed Oriented spindle stop (Spindle stops at

OSS
constant rotation position)
Rapid traverse
Manual feed Shift
P Dwell
Z Z point
(Hole bottom position)
Note 1 “d” of G73 and G83 is set by parameters.
113
When the drilling axis is Z axis, machining data in the canned cycle is
commanded as follows:
Format
Gff X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ K_ F_ ;
Drilling mode Gff ; See previous table.
Drilling position dataX, Y ; Command position of the hole.
Z : Specify hole end position shown in the previous table.
R : Specify R point position shown in the previous table.
Q : Specify cutting quantity with G73, G83, and shift quantity with
G76, G87,
P : Specify dwell time at the hole bottom.
K : Specify how may times to repeat.
When specified K0, drilling data will be set, but no drilling will
be done.
F : Specify feed rate for cutting.
Explanations
D R point level return (G99) By specifying G99, return point in canned cycle is specified to R point.
The drilling starts from the end point of the previous block. If the previous
block has ended in the initial point, it begins from the initial point and
returns to the R point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G99 mode
Initial level
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
R point
D Initial level return (G98) By specifying G98, return point in canned cycle is specified to the initial
level. The drilling starts from the end point of the previous block. If the
previous block has ended in the R point, it begins from the R point and
returns to the initial point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G98 mode
Initial level Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
R point
114
13.2
RIGID TAPPING
13.2.1 In tapping, the feed amount of drilling axis for one rotation of spindle
Rigid Tapping should be equal to the pitch of screw of tapper. Namely, the following
conditions must be satisfied in the best tapping:
P= F/S,
where P : Pitch of screw of tapper (mm)
F : Feed rate of drilling axis (mm/min)
S : Spindle speed (rpm)
The rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are independently controlled in
the tapping cycle G74/G84 (M series), G84/G88 (T series). Therefore, the
above conditions may not always be satisfied. Especially at the hole
bottom, both the rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis reduce the
speed and stop. After that, they move in the inverse direction while
increasing the speed. However, the above conditions may not be satisfied
in general since each acceleration/deceleration is performed
independently. Therefore, in general, the feed is compensated by
mounting a spring to the inside of holder of tapper to improve the accuracy
of tap cutting.
The rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis are controlled so that they
are always synchronous each other in the rigid tapping cycle. Namely, in
other than rigid tapping, control for speed only is performed. In the rigid
tapping however, position control is also performed during the rotation
of spindle, that is, the rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis are
controlled as linear interpolation of two axes.
This allows the following condition to be satisfied also during
acceleration/deceleration at the hole bottom and a tapping of improved
accuracy to be made.
P = F/S
The pitch of screw tap can be directly specified.
Rigid tapping can be performed by executing any of the following
commands:
M29 Sfffff before tapping command G74/G84 (M series)
or G84/G88 (T series)
M29 Sfffff in the same block as tapping command G74/G84
(M series) or G84/G88 (T series)
G74/G84 (M series) or G84/G88 (T series) as rigid tapping G code
(Whether G74/G84 (G84/G88) is used as rigid tapping G code or
ordinary tapping G code can be selected with a parameter.)
115
Spindle control
(voltage calculation of
spindle speed rpm)
CMR
Distrib- ×4 Error D/A Spindle Spindle
uted counter converter amplifier motor
pulse
Gear ratio
n:m
DMR
×4 Position Gear ratio Spindle
coder 1:p
The Control System of Spindle during Rigid Tapping
Gear ratio of spindle to Least command increment

position coder (1 : p) (detection unit ) deg
1:1 0.088 (1x360 / 4096)
1:2 0.176 (2x360 / 4096)
1:4 0.352 (4x360 / 4096)
1:8 0.703 (8x360 / 4096)
Even use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder enables
rigid tapping. In this case, the gear ratio of the spindle motor and the
spindle is set by the parameter.
In addition, use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder
enables rigid tapping but disables threading and per revolution dwell.
Pull–out override
D Parameter setting–based Override with a previously set parameter value can be applied to the
method pull–out operation.
Theoretically, it is possible to apply a pull–out override of up to 2000%
(20 times). (Also take machine–imposed restrictions into account.)
If an override result would exceed the maximum permissible spindle
rotation speed (specified in a parameter) for rigid tapping, the actual
spindle speed is clamped at the maximum permissible spindle rotation
speed.
116
D Program A program instruction can specify to apply override to a pull–out

instruction–based operation. (Using this method requires setting an additional parameter.)
method To specify pull–out override with a program instruction, specify a
pull–out spindle rotation speed as one of the hole making data items in
a G84 block, using the J address.
This instruction applies override with a value obtained in the following
expression to a pull–out operation.
Spindle rotation speed

(instruction with the J address)
for a return
100 = Pull–out override value
(instruction with the S address)
If the result of conversion made with the above expression does not fall
in a pull–out override range of from 100% to 2000%, the spindle rotation
instruction is disabled for the pull–out operation; the actual spindle
rotation becomes 100%.
If the J instruction value is greater than the maximum permissible spindle
rotation speed (specified in a parameter) for rigid tapping, the actual
spindle rotation speed is clamped at or near the maximum permissible
spindle rotation speed.
Example)
To make a pull–out operation twice faster than a cut–in operation, use
the following instructions:
@
M29 S1000;
G84 Z–1000. F1000 J2000 ;
@
Feedrate override Appropriate parameter setting enables the conventional feedrate override
select signal and override cancel signal even when rigid tapping is under
way.
In this case, the override value selected by the override select signal can
be used for rigid tapping.
D <G012#0–7> is used as the override select signal.
D <G006#4> is used as the override cancel signal.
D The override value can be changed even when rigid tapping is under
way.
D Using an applicable option enables the second feedrate override
function. This function is applied to the second feedrate that is
determined according to the first feedrate override function.
D The spindle override value is fixed at 100% when rigid tapping is
under way. Because the spindle operation is synchronized with the
operation of the tapping axis, the spindle speed is affected indirectly
by the feedrate override value.
D Enabling the feedrate override select signal disables pull–out override
(regardless of whether it is specified by a program instruction or owing
to a rigid tapping return), causing feedrate override to be applied to the
pull–out operation.
117
D Even if the feedrate override select signal is enabled, setting the

override cancel signal to 1 causes 100% override to be applied to a
cut–in operation. If pull–out override is enabled, it is applied to the
pull–out operation.
The following table lists rigid tapping versus override value
correspondence.
Rigid tapping versus feedrate override value correspondence
Cut–in Pull–out
operation operation
Feedrate override = Disabled 100% 100%

Pull–out override = Disabled
Feedrate override = Disabled 100% Pull–out

Pull–out override = Enabled override (*)
Feedrate override Override Feedrate Feedrate

= Enabled cancel signal override signal override signal
Pull–out override <G006#4>=0 value value
= Disabled
Override 100% 100%
cancel signal
<G006#4>= 1
Feedrate override Override Feedrate Feedrate

= Enabled cancel signal override signal override signal
Pull–out override <G006#4>=0 value value
= Enabled
Override 100% Pull–out
cancel signal override (*)
<G006#4>= 1
* The pull–out override can be any of the following:

<1> Parameter–set pull–out override
<2> Program–specified pull–out override
<3> Rigid tapping return–based pull–out override
118
13.2.2 M series Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration can be used for rigid tapping.

Rigid Tapping Generally, using bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration can reduce the
required acceleration/deceleration time because the time constant of rigid
Bell–shaped tapping can be decreased.
Acceleration/ For bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping, the linear
Deceleration (M series) acceleration/deceleration constant and the time corresponding to the
bell–shaped curve are specified using parameters.
The bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time for rigid tapping is the
sum of the time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration for the spindle
and rigid tapping axis (conventional parameter setting T1) and the time
corresponding to the curved portion (parameter setting T2).
Maximum per-
missible spindle
rotation speed
T1 Time
T2 T2
2 2
T1 = Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration for
the spindle and rigid tapping axis
T2 = Time constant for the curved portion of bell–shaped
T1 + T2 = Time required for acceleration/deceleration
The actual time constant of liner acceleration/deceleration for the spindle

and tapping axis, T1, is determined according to a ratio of the maximum
permissible spindle rotation speed to the actually specified S. However,
the time constant for the curved portion of bell–shaped acceleration/
deceleration is not proportional to the actual S instruction, so a constant
acceleration/deceleration (specified using a parameter) is always
maintained.
119
13.3 M series With the above program, external operation signal is output after
positioning. G80 command cancels the external operation function.
EXTERNAL
OPERATION
FUNCTION (G81) (M
series)
Format
G81 IP _ ;
IP : Optional combination of axis address X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
120
13.4 T series The following three kinds of canned cycle are provided.
CANNED CYCLES
FOR TURNING (T
series)
13.4.1
Cutting Cycle A (G77)
G90)
D Straight cutting cycle. The command below actuates a straight cutting cycle.
X axis
R : Rapid traverse
Z W F : Feed
4(R)
3(F) 1(R) U/2
2(F)
X/2
Z axis
Format
G77 X_ Z_ F_ ;
D Tapered cutting cycle The command below actuates a tapered cutting cycle.
In the figure below, when the direction of route 1 is –X, R is a negative
value. Inverting the sign of R enables reverse taper cutting.
X axis
Z 4(R)
R : Rapid traverse
3(F) 1(R) F : Feed
U/2
2(F)
R
X/2
W
Z axis
Format
G77 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
121
13.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
(G78) (with G Code
System A: G92)
D Straight thread cutting The command below actuates a straight thread cutting cycle.
cycle
X axis
Z W
4(R)
3(R)
1(R)
2(F)
X/2
Z axis
L
Detailed
chamfered R : Rapid traverse
thread F : Thread cutting
r : Chamfering amount
(parameter)
Approx.
45°
(The chamfered angle in the
r left figure is 45 degrees or less
because of the delay in the
servo system.)
Format
G78 X_ Z_ F_ ;
122
D Tapered thread cutting The command below actuates a tapered thread cutting cycle.
cycle
X axis
Z W
4(R)
U/2 1(R)
3(R
)
2(F)
R
X/2
Z axis
R : Rapid traverse
Detailed F : Thread cutting
chamfered
thread r : Chamfering amount
(parameter)
Approx.
45°
(The chamfered angle in the

r left figure is 45 degrees or less
because of the delay in the
servo system.)
Format
G78 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
NOTE
Screw chamfering can be inhibited by entering the
chamfering signal.
123
13.4.3
Turning Cycle in
Facing (G79)
G94)
D Face cutting cycle The command below actuates a face cutting cycle.
X axis 1(R)
R : Rapid traverse
F : Feed
2(F) 4(R)
U/2
3(F)
X/2 X/2
0 W
Z axis
Z
Format
G79 X_ Z_ F_ ;
D Face tapered cutting The command below actuates a face tapered cutting cycle.
cycle In the following figure, if the direction of the path 1 is negative in Z axis,
the sign of the number following address R is negative.
X axis 1(R
) R : Rapid traverse
F : Feed
2(F) 4(R)
U/2
3(F)
X/ R W
2 Z axis
Z
Format
G79 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
124
13.5 T series A multiple repetitive cycle is composed of several canned cycles. A tool
path for rough machining, for example, is determined automatically by
MULTIPLE giving the data of the finishing work shape. A thread cutting cycle has
REPETITIVE CYCLES also been prepared.
FOR TURNING
(G70 - G76) (T series)
13.5.1 There are two types of rough cutting cycles for external surfaces, type I
and type II.
Stock Removal in
Turning (G71)
D Type I If a finishing shape of A to A’ to B is given in the figure below, machining

is done with the cutting depth ∆d and the finishing allowance ∆U/2 and
∆W.
C
B (R)
A
(R) ∆d
(F)
45° e
(F)
Program
command
R : Rapid traverse ∆U/2

F : Cutting feed
d : Parameter setting A’
∆W
125
Format
G71 U(∆d) R(e) ;
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ; (ns)
N(ns) . . . . .
...........
. . . . . . . F_
. . . . . . . S_ A block between sequence numbers ns and nf
. . . . . . . T_ specifies the target figure between A and B.
N(nf) . . . . . . ;
∆d : Depth of cut. It is specified without sign. The cutting direction

is determined by the direction of AA’.
e : Clearance
ns : Sequence number of the first block of target figure blocks
nf : Sequence number of the end block of the target figure
blocks
∆u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance along X axis
∆w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance along Z axis
f, s, t : The F, S, and T specified by a block between ns and nf are
ignored during cycle operation. Those specified by the block
of G71 or before are effective.
F, S, and T in the blocks of move commands from A to B are ignored and

those specified in the same block as G71 or before are effective.
G96s (constant surface speed control on) and G97s (constant surface
speed control off) in the blocks of move commands from A to B are
ignored. A G96 or a G97 commanded in the same block as G71 or before
is effective. The following four patterns are given depending on the sign
of ∆U and ∆W as in the figure below. All of these cutting cycles are made
parallel to Z axis.
B A A
U(+)…W(+) U(+)…W(–)
A’ A’ Both linear and

circular interpolation
A’ A’ are possible.
+X
U(–)…W(+) U(–)…W(–)
A A +Z
For the path from A to A’, the block of sequence number ns specifies a
command including G00 or G01. For the path A’ to B, increase or decrease
must be steady in both X-axis and Z-axis directions.
If the command for the path from A to A’ is G00, the cutting along the path
is performed in the G00 mode. If the command for the path from A to A’
is G01, the cutting is performed in the G01 mode.
126
D Type II Type II differs from Type I in the following point.

Increase in X-axis direction does not need to be steady. Up to 10 pockets
are allowed.
10 ......... 3 2 1
In Z-axis direction, however, increase or decrease must be steady. The

following figure is not allowed for machining.
Change in Z-axis direction

is not steady.
The first cutting does not need to be vertical. Any profile is allowed as far
as the change in Z-axis direction is steady.
For clearance after turning, chamfering is performed along the workpiece
profile.
e (setting by parameter)
The following figure shows an example of a cutting path when there are
two pockets.
30
4
3 13 29 1
2 5
12 18 9 24
14 10 6
23 8 25
11 19 15 7
16
17 22 21 20 26
28
27
127
The offset of tool tip R is not added to the finishing allowance ∆u and ∆w.
It is assumed to be zero for cutting. Generally ∆w=0 is specified.
Otherwise, the tool catches into a side wall. The two axes X(U) and Z(W)
are specified in the first block of the repeat part. If there is no movement
in Z-axis direction, W0 is specified.
This function is effective only in memory mode.
D Use of Types I and II Type I:
Used when only one axis is specified in the first block (ns block) in the
repeat part.
Type II
Used when two axes are specified in the first block in the repeat part.
Example)
Type I Type II
G71 10.0 R5.0 ; G71 10.0 R5.0 ;

G71 P100 Q200 … ; G71 P100 Q200 … ;
N100 X(U)_ ; N100 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
: :
B200… ; B200… ;
128
13.5.2 As shown in the figure below, this cycle is the same as G71 except that
Stock Removal in cutting is made parallel to X-axis.
Facing (G72)
∆d
R : Rapid traverse
A’ C F : Feed
A d : Parameter setting
Tool path
(F)
(R)
e
(R)
45°
(F)
Command ∆u/2
B
∆w
Format
G72 W(∆d) R(e) ;

G72 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
∆d, e, ns, nf, ∆u, ∆w, f, s, and t are the same as those in G71.
For the shape to be cut by G72, the following four patterns are considered.
Any of them is cut by repetition of operation parallel to the X axis of the
tool. The signs of ∆U and ∆W are as follows:
+X
+Z
B B
U(–)…W(+)… U(–)…W(–)…
Both linear and cir-

A’ AA A’ cular interpolation
A’ AA A’ are possible.
U(+)…W(+)… U(+)…W(–)…
B B
This function is effective only in memory mode.
129
13.5.3 This function permits cutting a fixed cutting pattern repeatedly with the
Pattern Repeating position being displaced bit by bit. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to
efficiently cut the work whose rough shape has already been made by
(G73) rough machining, forging, or casting, etc.
R : Rapid traverse ∆k+∆w

F : Cutting feed D
∆w
C ∆u/2
A
(R)
∆u/2
A’
∆w
Pattern to be specified by the program

Point A→ Point A’→ Point B
Format
G73 U(∆i) W(∆k) R(d) ;
G73 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
N(ns) . . . . .
...........
. . . . . . . F_
. . . . . . . S_ The move commands for the target figure from A
. . . . . . . T_ to A’ then to B are specified by blocks between
N(nf) . . . . . . ; sequence numbers ns and nf.
∆i : Distance and direction of the clearance along X axis

(radius programming)
∆k : Distance and direction of the clearance along Z axis
d : Number of divisions which is equal to the number of times
that rough cutting is performed
ns : Sequence number of the first block of target figure blocks
nf : Sequence number of the end block of target figure blocks
∆u : Distance and direction of the finishing allowance along X
axis (diameter or radius programming)
∆w : Distance and direction of the finishing allowance along Z
axis
f, s, t : F, S, and T codes
CAUTION
F, S, and T specified by any block between ns and nf are
ignored. Those specified by the block of G73 or before are
effective.
This function is available for only memory mode.
130
13.5.4 After rough machining with G71, G72 or G73 the following command
Finishing Cycle (G70) actuates finishing.
Format
G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
P : Sequence number of cycle start (ns)
Q : Sequence number of cycle end (nf)
NOTE
F, S, and T codes specified in the block of G71, G72 or G73
are ignored. But F, S, and T codes specified in the blocks
from sequence numbers (ns) to (nf) become effective
The function is effective only in memory mode.
131
13.5.5 The following command permits operation as seen in the figure below.
Peck Drilling in Z-axis Chip breaking is possible in this cycle. Also if both X(U) and P are
omitted, the machining is done only in the Z-axis resulting in peck
(G74) drilling.
∆k’ ∆k ∆k ∆k ∆k
Dd A
[0<∆k’x∆k]
∆i
C (R)
(F)
(F) U/2
(F) (F) (F) (F)
∆i
∆i’
(R) (R) (R) (R)
X
(X_, Z_) B
[0<∆i’x∆i]
W
e R : Rapid traverse
F : Cutting feed
Format
G74 R(e) ;
X_ Z_
G74 X_ Z_ P(∆i) Q(∆k) U(∆d) F(f) ;
U_W_
e : Amount of return
X : X-axis coordinate of point B
U : Increment for A → B (for G code system A)
Z : Z-axis coordinate of point C
W : Increment for A → C (for G code system A)
∆i : Movement amount in X-axis direction (without sign)
∆k : Depth of cut in Z-axis direction (without sign)
∆d : Clearance amount at the cutting bottom
Usually a positive integer is specified. If X(U) and ∆i are
omitted, however, the sign indicating the direction is added.
f : Feedrate
132
13.5.6 The following tape command permits operation as seen in the figure
Grooving in X-axis below. This is equivalent to G74 except that X is replaced by Z. Chip
breaking is possible in this cycle. Grooving in the X-axis (in this case,
(G75) Z, W and Q are omitted) is possible.
(R) A
∆i
(F)
(R) e
(F)
(R)
(F)
U/2
(R)
(F)
(R)
(F)
∆d X
∆k
(X_, Z_)
R : Rapid traverse
W F : Cutting feed
Format
G75 R(e) ;
X_ Z_
G75 X_ Z_ P(∆i) Q(∆k) R(∆d) F(f) ;
U_W_
133
13.5.7 A thread cutting cycle as shown below can be made.

Thread Cutting Cycle E (R) A
(G76)
U/2 (R)
(F)
B
∆d
i D k
X r C
Z
W
R : Rapid traverse
F : Cutting feed
Format
G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q(∆d min) R(d) ;
X_ Z_
G76 X_ Z_
U_W_ R(i) P(k) Q(∆d) F(ȏ) ;
m : Number of final finishing repeats 1 to 99

r : Screw finishing (chamfering amount)
a : Tool tip angle (thread angle)
One of the six angles, 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°, and 0°, can
be selected as a 2-digit number. m, r, and a are specified in
address P at the same time.
Example)
When m = 2, r = 1.2ȏ, and a = 60 , they are specified as follows:
P02 12 60
m r a
∆bmin: Minimum depth of cut
d : Finishing allowance
i : Difference in thread radius
Straight threading for i = 0
k : Height of the thread (The distance in X-axis direction is
specified with a radius value.)
∆d : Depth of first cut (specified with a radius value)
ȏ : Screw lead (same as threading of G32)
134
Cutting method in detail Tool tip
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
B
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
α ∆d
∆dǸn
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
First
Second
Third
k
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
nth
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ d
NOTE
Thread chamfering can be inhibited by entering the
chamfering signal.
13.6 T series The canned cycles for drilling enable one block including the G function
to specify the machining which is usually specified by several blocks.
CANNED CYCLES Programming is then simplified.
FOR DRILLING The canned cycles for drilling conform to JIS B 6314.
(G80 - G89) (T series) Canned cycles
Operation
Drilling
G code Drilling at hole Clearance Use
axis
bottom
G80 Cancel
Cutting feed
Rapid
G83 Z axis Intermittent Dwell Deep drilling
traverse
feed
Spindle
G84 Z axis Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping
reverse
G85 Z axis Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring
Cutting feed
Rapid
G87 X axis Intermittent Dwell Deep drilling
traverse
feed
Spindle
G88 X axis Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping
reverse
G89 X axis Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring
135
13.7 T series A chamfer or corner are can be inserted between two blocks which
intersect at a right angle as follows. An amount of chamfering or corner
CHAMFERING AND are specifies by address I, K, or R.
CORNER R (T series)
D Chamfering
Z→X
Command Tool movement
G01 Z(W) I(C) ±i ; +X

Specifies movement to point b
with an absolute or incremental 45°
command in the figure on the c
right. i
a d
b
Start point –i
c
45°
Moves as a→b→c
–X
D Chamfering
X→Z
G01 X(U) K(C) ±k ;

Start point
Specifies movement to point b a
with an absolute or incremental
command in the figure on the Moves as a→b→c
right.
45° d 45°
–z +z
c c
–k b k
D Corner R
Z→X
G01 Z(W) R ±r ; +x

with an absolute or incremental r
command in the figure on the c
right. a d
b
Start point
–r c
Moves as a→b→c –x
136
D Corner R
X→Z
G01 X(U) R ±r ; Start point a

with an absolute or incremental
Moves as a→b→c
command in the figure on the
right.
–r r
d
–z +z
c b c
CAUTION
If C is not used as an axis name, C can be used for a chamfer
address instead of I or K.
X
530.0 N1 Z270.0 R60.0 ;
N2 X860.0 K–3.0 ;
270.0 N3 Z0 ;
C3
N3
N2
R6
N1
137
13.8 M series The block for chamfering or corner rounding can be inserted
automatically between two optional linear interpolations, or between the
OPTIONAL ANGLE linear interpolation and circular interpolation, or between two circular
CHAMFERING/ interpolations.
CORNER ROUNDING Specifying “,C_” inserts the block for chamfering, and specifying “,R_”
inserts the block for corner rounding. They must be specified at the end
(M series)
of the block which specifies the linear interpolation (B01) or circular
interpolation (G02 or G03).
The numeric following C specifies the distance between the virtual corner
intersection and the chamfering start or end point. See the figure below.
N1 G91 G01 X30.0, C10.0 ;

N2 X30.0 Y30.0 ;
(60, 30)
Inserted block for N2

chamfering
N1
(0, 0) 10
10
Virtual corner intersection
(30, 0)
The numeric following R specifies the radius value of corner rounding.

See the figure below.
N1 G91 G01 X30.0, R10.0 ;

N2 X30.0 Y30.0 ;
Arc center for (60, 30)

corner rounding
N2
R
N1
(0, 0) (30, 0)
138
13.9 T series Angles of straight lines, chamfering values, corner rounding values, and
other dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by
DIRECT DRAWING directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering and corner
DIMENSIONS rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an arbitrary angle.
PROGRAMMING (T The straight line angle, chamfering value, or corner rounding must be
specified with a comma as follows:
series)
,A_
,C_
,R_
NOTE
When A or C is not used as an axis name, the line angle,
chamfering value, or corner rounding can be specified in the
parameter without comma as follows:
A_
C_
R_
Command list
Command Movement of tool
X2_ (Z2_), A_ ; X
(X2 , Z2)
1
A
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
(X3 , Z3)
A2
, A1_ ;
2 X3_ Z3_, A2_ ;
A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ;
A2
X3_ Z3_ ; R1
3 or
, A1_, R1_ ; A1
X3_ Z3_, A2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
139
Command Movement of tool
X
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; A2
X3_ Z3_ ;
4 or
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ ; C1 A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
(X4 , Z4)
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ;
A2
X3_ Z3_, R2_ ; R2
X4_ Z4_ ;
5 or R1
, A1_, R1_ ;
X3_Z3_, A2_ R2_ ; A1
X4_ Z4_ ; (X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
C2
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
(X4 , Z4)
X3_ Z3_, C2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
6 or
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ C2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
X4_ Z4_ ; C1 A1
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
C2
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
X3_ Z3_, C2_ ; (X4 , Z4)
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
7 or
, A1_, R1_ ; R1
X3_ Z3_ , A2_ C2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
(X4 , Z4)
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
X3_ Z3_, R2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
8 or R2
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ R2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
X4_ Z4_ ; A1
C1
(X1 , Z1)
Z
140
13.10 M series Mirror image can be commanded on each axis by programming. Ordinary
mirror image (commanded by remote switch or setting) comes after the
PROGRAMMABLE programmable mirror image is applied.
MIRROR IMAGE D Setting of programmable mirror image
(G50.1, G51.1) (M G51.1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
series) is commanded and mirror image is commanded to each axis (as if
mirror was set on the axis).
D Programmable mirror image cancel
G50.1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
is commanded and the programmable mirror image is canceled.
CAUTION
If mirror image is specified only for one axis on the specified
plane, the operation of the commands is as follows:
D Arc command: The rotation direction is reversed.
D Cutter compensation: The offset direction is reversed.
D Coordinate rotation: The rotation angle is reversed.
When shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis, a program for

machining the whole part can be prepared by programming a part of the
workpiece using programmable mirror image and sub program.
Y Axis of symmetry (X=50)

Main program
(2) (1) N10 G00 G90 ;
100
N20 M98 P9000 ;
N30 G51.1 X50.0 ;
N40 M98 P9000 ;
N50 G51.1 Y50.0 ;
N60 M98 P9000 ;
60 N70 G50.1 X0 ;
Axis of symmetry (Cancel only X–axis)
50
(Y=50) N80 M98 P9000 ;
N90 G50.1 Y0 ;
Sub program
O9000 ;
G00 G90 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
(3) (4) G01 Y100.0 ;
G01 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
0 50 60 100 X M99
141
13.11 M series The index table on the machining center is indexed by using the fourth
axis as an indexing axis.
INDEX TABLE To command for indexing, an indexing angle is only to be specified
INDEXING (M series) following a programmed axis (arbitrary 1 axis of A, B, C as the rotation
axis) assigned for indexing. It is not necessary to command the exclusive
M code in order to clamp or unclamp the table and therefore programming
will become easy.
142
13.12 T series The repetitive machining specific to grinding can be specified by one
block. Since four types of canned cycles are provided for grinding,
CANNED CYCLES programming is simplified.
FOR CYLINDRICAL
GRINDING (T series)
Traverse grinding cycle
(G71, G72)
G71 : Dwell G72 : Dwell
Skip signal
Oscillating grinding
cycle (73, G74)
G73 G74
: Dwell : Dwell
Skip signal
143
13.12.1
Traverse Grinding
Cycle (G71) X W
(I)
A
(K)
U (Dwell) (I)
B

(K) U(Dwell)
G71 A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;
A : The first cutting depth
B : The second cutting depth
W : Grinding range
U : Dwell time Maximum command time 9999.999 sec.
I : Feed rate of A and B
K : Feed rate of W
H : Repetition frequency Setting value 1-9999
13.12.2
Traverse Direct Gauge
Grinding Cycle (G72) Skip signal
(Stopping) (Stopping) Skip signal
G72 P_ A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;
P : Gauge number (1-4)
If the option of the multi-step skip is employed, gauge number can be

specified. The specifying means of the gauge number is the same as the
multi-step skip. If the option of the multi-step skip is not employed, a
conventional skip signal becomes effective. Commands other than gauge
number are similar to G71.
144
13.12.3
Oscillation Grinding
Z
Cycle (G73)
W

(K)
U (Dwell) U (Dwell)
A

(B)
(K)
G73 A_ B_ W_ U_ K_ H_ ;
A : Cutting depth
B : Cutting depth
W: Grinding range
U : Dwell time
K : Feed rate
H : Repetition frequency Setting value 1-9999
13.12.4
Oscillation Direct Skip signal
Gauge Grinding Cycle
(G74)
Skip signal
(Stopping)
(Stopping)
G74 P_ A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ;
P : Gauge number (1-4)
If the option of the multi-step skip is employed, gauge number can be

specified. The specifying means of the gauge number is the same as the
multi-step skip. If the option of the multi-step skip is not employed, a
convectional skip signal becomes effective. Commands other than gauge
number are similar to G73.
145
13.13 M series In the surface grinding canned cycle, repeated cutting peculiar to grinding
machining normally commanded by a number of blocks, is simply
SURFACE GRINDING programmed by commanding one block which includes the G function.
CANNED CYCLE (M There are the following 4 types of grinding canned cycle.
series) D Plunge grinding cycle G75
D Plunge direct grinding cycle G77
D Continuous feed plane grinding cycle G78
D Intermittent feed plane grinding cycle G79
146
13.13.1 The plunge grinding cycle is possible by the following command.

Plunge Grinding Cycle
(G75)
Format
G75 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I : The first cutting depth

(Cutting direction is by command coding.)
J : The second cutting depth
K : Total cutting depth
X(Z) : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
R : Feed rate of I and J
F : Feed rate of X(Z)
P : Dwell time
L : Grindstone wear compensation number (Note 1)
Note 1) L is specified when performing continuous dressing.

Note 2) X(Z), I, J and K commands are all incremental commands.
Explanations
Y X(Z)
I (R) (F)
J P (R)
(F) P
X(Z)
The plunge grinding cycle is made up from the following sequence of 6

operations.
The operations from up to are repeated until the grindstone cutting
amount reaches the total cutting amount specified by address K.
Grindstone cutting :
Cuts in Y axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the first cutting depth 1. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by
R.
Dwell :
Performs dwell for only the time specified by P.
Grinding :
Shift by cutting feed only the amount specified by X (or Z) in the X
axis direction (or Z axis direction). The feed rate becomes the rate
specified by F.
147
Cuts in Y axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the second cutting depth J. The feed rate becomes the rate specified
by R.
Dwell :
Grinding (return direction) :
Sent at rate specified by F in the reverse direction only the amount
specified by X (or Z).
In case of single block, the operations from to are performed by one
cycle start. When cutting by 1 or J, in the case where the total cutting
depth is reached, the cycle finishes after the following sequence of
operations (up to ) has been executed. The cutting depth in this case
reaches the total cutting depth position.
D When total cutting depth

is reached by the cutting
operation of I or J

I
K
J

K
I


is reached in the middle
of cutting of I or J

K I
J

K
I

148
13.13.2 The plunge direct grinding cycle is possible by the following command.
Plunge Direct Grinding
Cycle (G77)
Format
G77 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
The command method is the same as the G75 case except for the G code.
Further, even for the operation, the same sequence of 6 operations as the
G75 case is repeated.
G77 differs from G75 as follows: Inputting a skip signal during a cycle
can terminate the cycle after stopping (or terminating) the current
operation sequence.
The following shows the operation at skip signal input for each operation
sequence.
Explanations
D Case of during operation Cutting immediately stops and returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence and
(when I and J shift)
Skip signal
Skip signal
(Stopping)
(Stopping)
D Case of during operation Dwell immediately stops and returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence and
(during dwell)
D Case of during operation After shift of X(Z) has finished, returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence and
(when X(Z) shifts)
Skip signal
(Stopping)
Skip signal
(Stopping)
149
13.13.3 The continuous feed plane grinding cycle is possible by the following
Continuous Feed Plane command.
Grinding Cycle (G78)
Format
G78 I_ (J)_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I : Cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)

J : Cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)
X : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
F : Feed rate
P : Dwell time

Note 2) X, I, J and K commands are all incremental commands.
Z
X
P(Dwell)
(F)
I
I(J) P(Dwell)
(F)
The continuous feed plane grinding cycle is made up from the following
sequence of 4 operations.
depth reaches the total cutting depth specified by address K.
Dwell
Grinding
Dwell
Grinding (return direction)
In case of single block, the operation from to are performed by one
cycle start.
NOTE
When J is not commanded, it is regarded as J=1.
Further, the J command effective only at the specified block.
It does not remain as modal information. (Irrespective of “J”
of G75, G77, and G79)
150
When cutting by I or J, in the case the total cutting depth is reached, the
cycle finishes after the following sequence of operations (up to 4) has been
executed. The cutting depth in this case reaches the total cutting depth
position.

is reached by cutting
operation of I or J.

K
I

J

K

I

D When the total cutting

depth is reached in the
middle of cutting of I or
J.

K
I

J

K
I

151
13.13.4 The intermittent feed plane grinding cycle is possible by the following
Intermittent Feed Plane command.
Grinding Cycle (G79)
Format
G79 I_ J_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I : The first cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)

J : The second cutting depth
X : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
R : Feed rate of I and J
F : Feed rate of X
P : Dwell time

Note 2) I, J, K and X commands are all incremental commands.
Z X
I (R) (F)
J P (R)
(F) P
The intermittent feed plane grinding cycle is made up from the following
sequence of 6 operations.
depth reaches the total cutting depth specified by address K.
Cuts in Z axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the first cutting depth I. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by
R.
Dwell :
Grinding :
Shifts by cutting feed only the amount specified by X in the X axis
direction. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by F.
Cuts in Z axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the second cutting depth J. The feed rate becomes the rate specified
by R.
152
Dwell :
Grinding (return direction) :
Sent at rate specified by F in the reverse direction only the amount
specified by X.
In the case of a single block, the operations from to are performed
by one cycle start.
153
13.14 M series Controls cutting a certain fixed amount along the programmed figure for
input of external signals at the swing end point.
INFEED CONTROL (M
series)
x
Z
Format
G161 R_ ;
Figure program
G160 ;
G161R_ : Commands the operation mode and start of start

of figure program. Further, specifies the cutting
depth by address R.
Figure program : Programs the workpiece figure in the Y-Z plane by
either linear interpolation (G01) or by circular
interpolation (G02, G03). Multiple blocks can be
commanded.
G160 : Commands cancelling of operation mode
(ending of figure program).
154
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION
14 TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION
155
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
14.1 T series
TOOL OFFSET (T
series)
14.1.1 By using this function, shift amount between the reference position
Tool Offset (T Code) assumed when programming and the actual tool position when
machining, can be set as tool offset amount, thus allowing workpiece
machining according to the programmed size without changing the
program.
Reference position
(start point)
X offset amount
Z offset amount
The tool offset can be commanded to X, Y, and Z axes.
Setting value of offset number 1

Offset path
Setting value of offset number 2
T11
T22
T20
Programmed path
Explanations
D Offset number The offset number is specified in the last one or two digit of the T code.
Use parameters to select offset number digits (one or two).
- When offset number is specified with one digit
T fffffffl
Offset number
Tool number
- When offset number is specified with two digits
T ffffffll
Offset number
Tool number
When the offset number is specified, the corresponding offset amount is

selected, and tool offset starts.
When 0 is selected as offset number, the tool offset is canceled.
156
14.1.2 The tool geometry compensation function compensates the tool figure or
Tool Geometry tool mounting position. The tool wear compensation function
compensates the wear of a tool tip. These compensation amounts (offset
Compensation and values) can be set separately. There are two types of geometry
Tool Wear compensation: So–called geometry compensation and the second
Compensation geometry compensation that allows the user to specify whether to use the
direction directed by the PMC. The second geometry compensation is
used to compensate for the difference in tool mounting position or
selected position. If distinction between them is not necessary, the total
value of them is set as a tool position offset value.
Point in the program Point in the program
X-axis
geometry
offset X-axis
value offset
value
X-axis wear
offset value
Z-axis wear Z-axis offset value

offset value Z-axis geometry
offset value
Tool geometry compensation Tool geometry compensation

and tool wear compensation distinguished from tool wear
not distinguished compensation
157
14.2 T series With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
machining, for value of the tool radius set in the CNC.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS By programming machining pattern using this function (measuring cutter
COMPENSATION radius for actual cutting, and setting the value in the CNC as offset value),
(G40, G41, G42) (T the tool can machine the programmed pattern, via the offset path. There
is not need to change the program even when tool radius changes; just
series)
change the offset value.
Work-
piece
Tool center path Tool
nose
Profile
Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the CNC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, Programming
becomes simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining
pattern.
Explanations
D Tool nose radius G40 : Tool nose radius compensation cancel
compensation and its G41 : Tool nose radius compensation left
cancellation (G40, G41, G42 : Tool nose radius compensation right
G42) G41 and G42 are commands for tool nose radius compensation mode.
The tool is offset to the left forward in the tool movement in G42 and right
forward in G42. Tool nose radius compensation is cancelled with G40.
G42 X
Workpiece
Z
G41
158
D Imaginary tool nose The tool nose at position A in the following figure does not actually exist.
The imaginary tool nose is required because it is usually more difficult to
set the actual tool nose center to the start point than the imaginary tool
nose. (Note) Also when imaginary tool nose is used, the tool nose radius
need not be considered in programming.
Start point
Start point
When programmed using the tool When programmed using the
nose center imaginary tool nose
The position relationship when the tool is set to the start point is shown
in the following figure. The point of tool nose for start point or reference
point i set in offset memory same as tool nose radius compensation
amount.
Setting point of tool nose

2 6 1 2 6 1
7 0 5 7 0 5
3 8 4 3 8 4
2 6 1 2 6 1
7 0 5 7 0 5
3 8 4 3 8 4
D Tool nose radius Tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point can
compensation amount be set in the tool nose radius compensation memory.
and assignment of When the last one or two digits of T code is commanded as offset number,
imaginary tool nose corresponding tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary tool
point (T code) nose point in the tool compensation memory is applied as the tool nose
radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point for cutter
radius compensation.
159
D Plane selection Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, ZX, YZ planes and on parallel
(G17, G18, G19) axes of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform tool nose radius compensation is selected with G17,
G18, G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane Xp : X axis or the parallel axis
G18 : Zp-Xp plane Yp : Y axis or the parallel axis
G19 : Yp-Zp plane Zp : Z axis or the parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes is to be
the additional axis.
D Interference check Tool overcutting is called ’interference’. This function checks whether
interference occurs, if tool nose radius compensation is performed.
Tool nose Programmed

center path path
r
Overcutting Overcutting
160
14.3 M series By setting the difference between tool length assumed when
programming and the actual tool length as offsets, workpiece can be
TOOL LENGTH machined according to the size commanded by the program, without
COMPENSATION changing the program.
(G43, G44, G49) (M
series)
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Reference
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
tool
Difference set as offset value
Explanations
D Tool length G43 : Tool length compensation +
compensation and its G44 : Tool length compensation –
cancellation G49 : Tool length compensation cancel
(G43, G44, G49)
In G43 mode, the tool is offset to the + direction for the preset tool length
offset amount. In G44 mode, it is offset to the - direction for the preset
tool length offset amount. G49 cancels tool length compensation.
D Tool length Tool length compensation can be performed for three types of axes.
compensation axis Compensation for the Z axis is tool length compensation A. That for the
axis vertical to the selected plane is tool length compensation B. That for
the axis specified by the G43 or G44 block is tool length compensation
C. Which compensation to perform can be selected by a parameter.
D Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
amount (H code) By specifying an offset number with the H code, offset amount loaded in
corresponding tool length compensation memory is used as tool length
compensation amount.
Format
Tool length compensation A
G43
G44 H_ ;
Tool length compensation B
G17
G43 H_ ;
G18
G44
G19
Tool length compensation C
G43
G44 α_ H_ ; (α: arbitrary 1 axis)
161
14.4 M series The programmed tool movement can be expanded or reduced for offset
amount preset in the tool length compensation memory, by using this
TOOL OFFSET function.
(G45, G46, G47, G48)
(M series)
Explanations
D G45, G46, G47, G48 G45: Tool offset expansion
G46: Tool offset reduction
G47: Tool offset double expansion
G48: Tool offset double reduction
By commanding G45 - G48, expansion, reduction, double expansion,
double reduction to axis move commanded in the program can be
performed for the offset amount preset in the tool length compensation
memory. The same offset amount is applied to all move command axes
in the same block as G45 - G48.
G code Tool offset value is positive Tool offset value is negative
G45
Start End Start End
point point point point
G46
Start End Start End
G47
Start End Start End
G48
Start End Start End
Movement distance
Tool offset value
Actual movement distance
D Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
amount (D code) By commanding an offset number with the D code, offset amount
corresponding to the number in the tool length compensation memory is
used as tool offset amount.
162
14.5 M series
CUTTER
COMPENSATION (M
series)
14.5.1 With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
Cutter Compensation C machining, for value of the tool radius set in the CNC.
By measuring cutting radius for actual cutting, and setting the value in the
(G40 - G42) NC as offset value, the tool can machine the programmed pattern, via the
offset path. There is no need to change the program even when tool radius
changes; just change the offset value.
Programmed path
Tool center path
Cross point
Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the CNC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, programming
becomes simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining
pattern.
D Cutter compensation and G40 : Cutter radius compensation cancel

its cancellation G41 : Cutter radius compensation left
(G40, G41, G42) G42 : Cutter radius compensation right
G41 and G42 are commands for cutter radius compensation mode. The
cutter is offset to the left forward in the cutter movement in G42 and right
forward in G42. Cutter radius compensation is cancelled with G40.
D Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the cutter radius compensation memory.
amount (D code) When the D code is commanded as an offset number, corresponding offset
amount in the tool compensation memory is applied as the offset amount
for cutter radius compensation.
The offset can be specified with an H code when the parameter is set
accordingly.
163
D Plane selection Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, ZX, YZ planes and on parallel
(G17, G18, G19) axes of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is selected with G17, G18,
G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane
G18 : Zp-Xp plane
G19 : Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis
Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes is to be
the additional axis.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is decided in the axis address

commanded in the G17, G18, or G19 block.
Example)
(U, V, W axes are parallel axes of X, Y, Z axes respectively)
G17 X_ ; XY plane
G17 U_ W_ ; UV plane
G19 Y_ W_ ; YW plane
If axis address of Xp, Yp, or Zp was omitted, compensation plane is
decided regarding that X, Y, or Z was omitted.
D Interference check Tool overcutting is called ’interference’. This function checks whether
interference occurs, if cutter radius compensation is performed.
Tool nose Programmed

center path path
r
Overcutting Overcutting
164
14.6
TOOL
COMPENSATION
MEMORY
14.6.1 M series Tool compensation memory C is provided as tool compensation amount

memory.
Tool Compensation
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Memory (M series)
Geometry compensation Tool wear compensation
Increment
system
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
IS-B ±999.999mm ±99.9999inch ±99.999mm ±9.9999inch
IS-C ±999.9999mm ±99.9999inch ±99.9999mm ±9.99999inch
Explanations
D Tool compensation Memory for geometry compensation as well as tool wear compensation
memory C is prepared separately in tool compensation memory C. Geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation can thus be set separately.
Separate memories are prepared for cutter radius compensation (for D
code) and for tool length compensation (for H code).
Example
For D code For H code

Offset
number Geometry Wear Geometry Wear
compensation compensation compensation compensation
001 10.0 0.1 100.0 0.1
002 20.0 0.2 300.0 0.3
14.6.2 T series Wear compensation memory and geometry compensation memory are
Tool Offset Amount provided as tool compensation amount memory.
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Memory (T series)
Tool compensation value
Increment
system
Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)
IS-B –999.999 to +999.999 –99.9999 to +99.9999
IS-C –999.9999 to +999.9999 –99.99999 to +99.99999
The maximum wear compensation value can, however, be modified using

a parameter.
165
The number of digits used to specify a tool geometry/wear compensation

value can be expanded by selecting the option which enables seven–digit
tool offset specification. When this option is used, tool compensation
values can be specified using up to seven digits for IS–B and eight digits
for IS–C. The valid data range for tool compensation values will thus be
as listed in the following table.
Tool compensation value
Increment
system
Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)
IS-B 0 to ±9999.999 0 to ±999.9999
0 to ±9999.9999 0 to ±999.99999
IS-C
(0 to ±4000.0000) (0 to ±160.00000)
NOTE
The range enclosed in parentheses applies when automatic
inch/metric conversion is enabled.
D Tool geometry/wear Memory for geometry offset and tool wear offset is prepared separately.
compensation Geometry offset and tool wear offset can thus be set separately.
X axis geometry offset ÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
X axis wear offset
Z axis wear offset Z axis geometry offset
X axis offset Z axis offset Tool nose radius com-

value value pensation value Imaginary
Offset
tool nose
number
Geometry Wear Geometry Wear Geometry Wear number
offset offset offset offset offset offset
01 10.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 0.4 0.1 3
02 20.2 0.2 150.0 0.3 0.5 0.2 2
03 30.4 0.4 200.0 0.5 1.2 –0.2 8
166
14.7
NUMBER OF TOOL
OFFSETS
14.7.1 M series D 400 tool offsets

Number of Tool Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 400 can be used.
D00 - D400 or H00 - H400
Offsets (M series)
14.7.2 T series D 64 tool offsets

Number of Tool Offsets Offset numbers 0 - 64 can be used.
(T series)
167
14.8 Tool offset amount can be set/changed with the G10 command.
When G10 is commanded in absolute input (G90), the commanded offset
CHANGING OF TOOL amount becomes the new tool offset amount. When G10 is commanded
OFFSET AMOUNT in incremental input (G91), the current tool offset amount plus the
(PROGRAMMABLE commanded offset amount is the new tool offset amount.
DATA INPUT) (G10)
Format (M series)
D Tool compensation
memory C
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for H code
G10 L10 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for D code
G10 L12 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of tool wear offset amount for H code
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
Setting/changing of tool ware offset amount for D code
G10 L13 P_ R_ ;
NOTE
L1 may be used instead of L11 for the compatibility with the
conventional CNC’s format.
168
Format (T series)
G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
or
G10 P_ U_ W_ C_ Q_ ;
P : Offset number
1–64 :Tool wear offset number
10000+(1–64) : Tool geometry offset number+10000
X : Offset value on X axis (absolute)
Z : Offset value on Z axis (absolute)
U : Offset value on X axis (incremental)
W : Offset value on Z axis (incremental)
R : Tool nose radius offset value (absolute)
R : Tool nose radius offset value (incremental)
Q : Imaginary tool nose number
In an absolute command, the values specified in addresses X, Z, and R are

set as the offset value corresponding to the offset number specified by
address P. In an incremental command, the value specified in addresses
U, W, and C is added to the current offset value corresponding to the offset
number.
NOTE
1 Addresses X, Z, U, and W can be specified in the same
block.
2 Use of this command in a program allows the tool to
advance little by little. This command can also be used input
offset values one at a time from a tape by specifying this
command successively instead of inputting these values
one at a time from the MDI unit.
169
14.9 M series The grinding-wheel cutting and dresser cutting are compensated
continuously during grinding in the canned cycles for surface grinding
GRINDING-WHEEL (G75, and G77 to G79). They are compensated according to the amount
WEAR of continuous dressing.
COMPENSATION BY
CONTINUOUS V
DRESSING (M series)
Explanations
D Specification The offset number (grinding-wheel wear compensation number) is
specified by address L in the block for the canned cycles for surface
grinding. The compensation amount set in the offset memory
corresponding to the specified number is the dressing amount.
D Compensation Compensation is performed for each cutting operation (each X-axis

movement) in the canned cycles for grinding. Along with X-axis
movement, compensation is performed both in Y-axis direction
(grinding-wheel cutting) and that in V-axis direction (dresser cutting).
That is, compensation is performed for interpolation for the three
coordinates simultaneously. The Y-axis movement amount
(compensation amount) is the specified dressing amount. The V-axis
movement amount is twice the specified dressing amount (diameter).
a : Dressing amount
Dresser
2a
V Y
Grinding
X wheel
X
Workpiece
170
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION
15 ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION
171
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
15.1 The errors caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw,
can be compensated. This function is for better machining precision.
STORED PITCH As the offset data are stored in the memory as parameters, compensations
ERROR of dogs and settings can be omitted. Offset intervals are set constant by
COMPENSATION parameters (per axis).
This function can perform compensation as described below.
D Compensation period: Constant period for each axis (parameter
settings (for each axis))
D Compensation points: Total of 1,024 points
Optional distribution to each axis
(parameter settings (for each axis))
D Amount of compensation: The following compensation pulse is
output at each compensation point.
Compensation pulse = (–7 to +7) (compensation magnification)
Unit: Same as the detection unit
–7 to +7: Setting for each compensation point (setting within
the range of –7 to +7)
Compensation magnification: 1 to 100 times
Constant magnification for each axis (parameter
settings (for each axis))
15.2 In bi–directional pitch error compensation, different pitch error

compensation amounts can be set for travel in the positive direction and
BI–DIRECTIONAL that in the negative direction, so that pitch error compensation can be
PITCH ERROR performed differently in the two directions, in contrast to stored pitch
COMPENSATION error compensation, which does not distinguish between the directions of
travel. In addition, when the direction of travel is reversed, the
compensation amount is automatically calculated from the pitch error
compensation data to perform compensation in the same way as in
backlash compensation. This reduces the difference between the paths in
the positive and negative directions.
172
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION
15.3 This function is used to compensate lost motions proper to the machine
system. Offset amounts come in a range of 0 to ±9999 pulses per axis,
BACKLASH and is set as parameters in detection unit.
COMPENSATION
15.4 Since different backlash compensation values can be used for cutting feed
and rapid traverse, the machining precision is improved.
BACKLASH The following table shows backlash amounts according to the feedrate
COMPENSATION and movement direction. In the table, the backlash compensation amount
FOR EACH RAPID for cutting feed is A, and that for rapid traverse is B. A and B are set in
parameters.
TRAVERSE AND
CUTTING FEED Cutting Rapid Rapid Cutting
feed traverse traverse feed
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Cutting Rapid Cutting Rapid
feed traverse feed traverse
Movement in same direction 0 0 ±α ±(–α)
Movement in opposite directions ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)
*1) α=(A–B) / 2
*2) Sings (+ and –) indicate directions.
Stop in cutting feed
A
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
Cutting feed
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
Stop in rapid traverse
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
α B
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
α
Rapid traverse ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ

ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
α : Excess of machine movement
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
173
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
15.5 Parameters and pitch errors data can be set by programs. Therefore,
following uses can be done example.
PROGRAMMABLE
D Parameter setting such as pitch errors compensation data, etc. When
PARAMETER INPUT the attachment is replaced.
(G10, G11) D Parameters such as max. Cutting speed and cutting feed time constant
can be changed according to the machining conditions.
Format
G10 L50 ;
N_ R_ ; Input of parameters except axis type
N_ P_ R_ ; Input of axis type parameters
:
G11 ;
G10 L50 : Parameter input mode

G11 : Parameter input mode cancel
N_ : Parameter No. (or pitch error data No.+10000)
P_ : Axis No. (in the case of axis type parameter)
R_ : Parameter setting value (or pitch error data)
NOTE
Some parameters cannot be set.
174
16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION CONVERSION
16 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION
175
CONVERSION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
16.1 M series Patterns specified by the program can be rotated. For example, by using
this function, when the attached workpiece comes in a position which is
COORDINATE somewhat rotated from the machine coordinates, the position can be
SYSTEM ROTATION compensated by the rotation instruction.
(G68, G69) (M series) If a pattern is similar to that made by rotating a programmed figure, the
program for the pattern can be created by calling the program for the figure
as a sub program, and rotating the coordinates in the program. This
function reduces the programming time and program length.
Rotation angle
Rotation
center
X
0
Format
M series
G17
G18 G68 α_ β_ R_ ;
G19
Coordinate system rotation mode

(Coordinate system rotates.)
G69 ; Coordinate system rotation cancel
α, β : Coordinate valne of rotation center specify two axes from X, Y,

Z axes of G17, G18, G19.(These are always absolute values.)
R : Rotation (+ for the counterclockwise direction.
Specified in absolute value. It can be also specified
in incremental values according to the parameter setting. )
By this command, commands thereafter are rotated in the angle

commanded by R, with the point commanded by α, β as the rotation
center. Rotation angle is commanded in 0.001 x units in a range of:
–360000 x R x 360000
The rotation plane is the plane selected (G17, G18, G19) when G68 was
commanded.
G17, G18 and G19 may not be commanded in the same block as G68.
When α, β is omitted, the point where G68 was commanded becomes the
rotation center.
G69; Cancels the coordinate system rotation.
176
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION CONVERSION
16.2 M series Scaling can be commanded to figures commanded in the machining

programs.
SCALING (G50, G51)
(M series)
Format
When each axis is scaling of the same magnification
Format Sign explanation

X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command of
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_ ; Scaling start center coordinate value of
scaling
Scaling is effective. P_ : Magnification of scaling
(Scaling mode)
G50 ; Scaling cancellation
By this command, scaling of the magnification specified by P is

commanded with the point commanded by X, Y, Z as its center. G50
cancels to scaling mode.
G50 : Scaling mode cancel
G51 : Scaling mode command
Commandable magnification is as follows :
0.00001 - 9.99999 times or 0.001 - 999.999
Y P3
P4
P4’ P3’
P0 : Center of scaling
P1’ P0 P2’
P1 P2
X
0
If P was not commanded, the magnification set by parameters is applied.

When X, Y, Z are omitted, the point where G51 was commanded becomes
the center of scaling.
Scaling cannot be done to offset amounts such as tool length
compensation, cutter radius compensation, or tool offset.
Scaling
down to 1/2
177
CONVERSION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
A scaling magnification can be set for each axis or for all axes in common.
A parameter can specify whether it should be set for each axis or for all
axes.
Format
Scaling of each axis (Mirror image)
Format Sign explanation
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ; Scaling X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command of

start center coordinate value of
Scaling is effective. scaling
(Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Magnification of scaling
of X axis, Y axis, and
G50 ; Scaling cancellation Z axis
(Unit 0.001 or 0.00001 is
selected according to
the parameter.)
The magnification which can be
instructed is as follows.
±0.00001–±9.99999 or
±0.001–±999. 999
If magnifications I, J, or K are not specified, the magnification of each axis

set by a parameter is used.
X axis
Profile of machining program
d Profile after
scaling
0
Y axis
a
b
a/b : X-axis scaling magnification

c/d : Y-axis scaling magnification
o : Center of scaling
178
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
17 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
179
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
17.1 By commanding axis move after G31, linear interpolation can be

commanded like in G01. If an external skip signal is input during this
SKIP FUNCTION (G31) command, the remainder of this command is cancelled, and program
skips to the next block.
G31 is a one-shot command and is valid for the commanded block only.
G31 G91 X100.0 F100; G31 G90 X200.0 F100;

Y50.0 ; X300.0 Y100.0 ;
Skip signal input (300, 100)

50.0 Skip signal input
200.0
100.0
Actual movement
With no skip signal input
Coordinate value when skip signal is on, is stored in the system variables
#5061 - #5068 of the customer macro, so this function can also be read
with the customer macro function.
#506n : ntn axis skip signal position (n=1–8)
As the skip function can be used when move amount is not clear, this
function can be used for:
D Constant feed in grinding machines
D Tool measurement with tactile sensor.
180
17.2 n blocks with either of P1 to P4 following G31 commanded, the

coordinate value where skip signals (4 types) were input is stored in the
MULTI-STEP SKIP custom macro variables, and at the same time, the remaining movement
FUNCTION of the block is skipped. It is also possible to skip the remaining dwell with
(G31 P1 - G31 P4) the skip signal by parameter, in a block where: G04 is commanded
(dwell).
Parameters decide which skip command or dwell command is valid to
which of the four skip signals. The skip signal is not necessarily unique
to a single skip command or dwell command; it is also possible to set a
skip signal to multiple skip command or dwell commands.
17.3 Delay and error of skip signal input is 0–2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
HIGH-SPEED SKIP This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec
SIGNAL INPUT or less, thus allowing high precision measurement. This signal is
connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC.
17.4 T series With the motor torque limited (for example, by a torque limit command,
issued through the PMC window), a move command following G31 P99
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP (or G31 P98) can cause the same type of cutting feed as with G01 (linear
(G31 P99, G31 P98) interpolation).
(T series) Skip operation is performed when the motor torque reaches the limit,
when the tool is pushed back for example, during cutting feed.
For details of how to use this function, refer to the manuals supplied by
the machine tool builder.
Format
G31 P99 IP _ F_ ;
G31 P98 IP _ F_ ;
G31 : One–shot G code (G code effective only in the block in which

it is issued)
P99 : Skip operation is performed when the motor torque reaches
the limit or the skip signal is input.
P98 : Skip operation is performed only when the motor torque reaches
the limit (regardless of the skip signal).
181
17.5 M series Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has reached
the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring position is
TOOL LENGTH automatically measured, calculated, and added to the currently set tool
AUTOMATIC offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be equipped with
MEASUREMENT measuring devices, for example tactile sensor, so that a signal is sent when
the tool end has reached the measuring position.
(G37) (M series)
Measuring position coordinate value is commanded as follows:
Format
G37 α_ ;
α : The measuring position is commanded in by either X, Y, or Z.
ε ε
Start position
S A B M C
Measuring position
γ : Deceleration point (parameter)

ε : Allowable measuring range (parameter)
The tool is moved from the start position to the deceleration point A in
rapid traverse, tool speed is decelerated to the measurement speed preset
by parameter, and moved on till the measuring position reach signal is
output. In case measuring position reach signal is not output in the
allowable measuring range (from point B to C), and alarm arises.
(New offset amount) = (Old offset amount) + (Measuring position
reach signal detected position) - (measuring position)
182
17.6 T series Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has reached
the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring position is
AUTOMATIC TOOL automatically measured, calculated, and added to the currently set tool
OFFSET (G37, G36) (T offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be equipped with
series) measuring devices, for example tactile sensor, so that a signal is sent when
the tool end has reached the measuring position.
Measuring position coordinate value is commanded as follows:
Format
G36 X_ ;
or
G37 Z_ ;
ε ε
Start position
S A B M C
Measuring position
γ : Deceleration point (parameter)

ε : Allowable measuring range (parameter)
The tool is moved from the start position to the deceleration point A in
rapid traverse, tool speed is decelerated to the measurement speed preset
by parameter, and moved on till the measuring position reach signal is
output. In case measuring position reach signal is not output in the
allowable measuring range (from point B to C), and alarm arises.
(New offset amount) = (Old offset amount) + (Measuring position
reach signal detected position) - (measuring position)
183
17.7 M series The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory
as an offset value by a soft key.
TOOL LENGTH Call offset value display screen. Relative positions are also displayed on
MEASUREMENT (M this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for
series) measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by hand. The relative
position display at this point shows difference between the reference tool
and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set
as offset amounts.
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Reference tool
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
This difference is set
as offset amount
Fixed point
184
17.8 T series This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece

diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.
DIRECT INPUT OF First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
TOOL OFFSET manually. When a button on the machine operator’s panel is pressed upon
VALUE completion of the cutting, the work coordinate value at that time is
recorded. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the
MEASURED/DIRECT
diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or distance from
INPUT OF the standard face if it was on the facing. (The standard face is made as Z
WORKPIECE = 0.) When the measured value is entered into the offset number desired
COORDINATE plus 100, NC inputs the difference between the input measured value and
the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the offset
SYSTEM SHIFT number.
AMOUNT (T series) The work coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly
inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the
coordinate system planned in the program does not match with the
coordinate system set by the G92 command or by the automatic
coordinate system setting.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool.
ÇÇÇÇ
x X X-Z:Coordinate system planned in the program
x-z : Coordinate set actually
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
B face
O’ z
Z
O α
A face
Reference point
planned in the program β
Cut A or B face and measure β or α. Direct input the measured value.
185
17.9 T series By installing the touch sensor and by manually making the tool contact
the touch sensor, it is possible to set the offset amount of that tool
DIRECT INPUT OF automatically in the tool offset amount memory. It is also possible to set
TOOL OFFSET the work coordinate system shift amount automatically.
VALUE MEASURED B In addition, a tool compensation value measured value direct input B
function for two–spindle lathes is provided so that the tool compensation
(T series)
value measured value direct input B function can be used for both spindles
of a one–turret two–spindle lathe.
Explanations
D Touch sensor As the touch sensor detection mode, either four–contact input mode or
single–contact input mode can be selected.
1) Four–contact input (when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 0)

The touch sensor has contact faces in two directions along each axis,
and outputs four signals when a touch is detected. These signals are
input to the CNC as tool compensation value writing signals (+MIT1,
+MIT2, –MIT1, and –MIT2).
When any of these input signals is input, the CNC stops feed in the
corresponding direction along the corresponding axis.
2) Single–contact input (when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set

to 1)
The touch sensor outputs one signal when a touch by a single–contact
input is detected. This signal is input to the CNC as the tool
compensation value writing signal (+MIT1).
Then, the CNC determines the two directions along each axis
automatically and stops feed in the corresponding direction along the
corresponding axis.
Parameter
Signal
TS1=0 TS1=1
+MIT1 Contact the (+) contact face of the The two directions
X–axis (Contact in the X+ direction) along each axis is de-
termined automatically.
–MIT1 Contact the (–) contact face of the Not used

X–axis (Contact in the X– direction)
+MIT2 Contact the (+) contact face of the Not used

Z–axis (Contact in the Z+ direction)
–MIT2 Contact the (–) contact face of the Not used

Z–axis (Contact in the Z– direction)
186
(–) contact face of X axis

(–MITX)
(+) contact face

of Z axis (–) contact face of Z axis
(+MITZ) (–MITZ)
+X
(+) contact face of X axis

(+MITX)
+Z
D Setting method
- Setting of tool compensation value
Previously set the distance from the measurement reference position
(a particular point on the machine) to the measuring position (the touch
sensor contact face) to the parameter as the reference value.
As the tool of which the offset amount is to be measured is selected and
is positioned at the measuring position (contact the touch sensor), the
contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal) from
the touch sensor is received, and the difference between the machine
coordinate value at that time (= the distance from the measured tool
nose tip position at the machine reference position (machine zero
point) to the measuring position) and the reference value (parameter
value) is set in the tool offset amount memory as the tool geometry
offset amount of that tool. The corresponding tool wear offset amount
becomes zero.
Tool offset Machine coordi- Reference value
nate value when (value of parameter)
amount to = tool compensa- + corresponding to
be set tion value write tool compensation
signal turns “1” value write signal
The tool offset amount to be set depends on how to determine the
measurement reference position.
187
Supplement : When single–contact input (when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter

No. 5004 is set to 1) is set for touch detection in the touch sensor
When receiving the touch detection signal (tool compensation value
writing signal +MIT1) from the touch sensor, the CNC determines the
two directions along each axis automatically according to the number
of pulses stored for the movement along each axis that has been made
until the input of the signal. (Set the number of interpolation cycles
of stored pulses in parameter No. 5021 in advance.)
After determining the two directions along each axis automatically,
the CNC applies axis interlock to the corresponding axis direction to
stop feed operation, and the calculated tool compensation value is
stored in tool compensation memory.
When stored pulses show various directions, when the servo power is
shut down (the servo off state), or when no pulse is stored because no
axis movement has taken place, the direction cannot be determined,
so P/S alarm No. 5195 is generated.
Also when the tool moves along two axes (the X–axis and Z–axis), the
P/S alarm is generated. So, the tool must be moved along just one axis.
If the P/S alarm is generated, the tool compensation value is not set,
and the two axes and four directions are interlocked.
NOTE
1 Pulses used for automatic determination are stored while
the tool compensation value writing mode select signal
GOSQM <G039#7> is 1 in manual mode. These pulses are
lost when:
a. A mode other than manual mode is set.
b. The tool compensation value writing mode select signal
GOSOM <G039#7> is driven to 0.
c. The tool compensation value is set upon reception of the
touch detection signal from the touch sensor, or P/S
alarm No. 5195 is generated.
d. The servo off state is entered. In this case, the pulses
stored for the axis for which the servo off state is entered
are lost.
e. Axis movement is performed. In this case, pulses stored
for the other axis along which no movement takes place
are lost.
2 Axis interlock applied in the axis direction determined
automatically and two–axis four–direction interlock applied
due to a P/S alarm are released when a mode other than
manual mode is set or when the tool compensation value
writing mode select signal GOSQM <G039#7> is driven to
0. This type of interlock is not released by a reset operation.
188
- Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount

The workpiece coordinate system shift amount along the Z axis is to
be set as follows. When the tool touches the end face of the workpiece,
the touch detection signal (workpiece coordinate system shift write
signal) is output. This signal is used to set the workpiece coordinate
system shift, calculated by subtracting the tool geometry
compensation value (shift of coordinate system due to tool geometry
compensation) from the current machine coordinate (distance between
the end face of the workpiece and the tip of the measurement tool when
it is at the machine reference position (machine zero point)). In this
case the tool geometry offset amount corresponding to the tool must
be programmed previously.
Workpiece coordi- Tool geometry offset
Machine
nate system shift amount of Z axis of +
coordinate value
amount along Z axis = corresponding tool
of Z axis (Zt)
to be set (EXOFSz) (OFSz)
By the above procedure the workpiece coordinate system with the

workpiece edge (sensor contact point) being taken as the workpiece
coordinate system zero point of the Z axis (the program zero point) is set
when the tool is selected by the program command (T code).
Machine
zero point
+X Zt
OFSZ
–EXOFSZ Measured tool
nose position
+Z at machine ref-
OFSX erence position
Workpiece coordinate
system zero point
(Program zero point)
EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset amount
Zt : Machine coordinate value (Distance to workpiece edge)
189
17.10 T series By manipulating soft keys, a position value displayed on the relative
position display can be set to the offset memory.
TOOL OFFSET Call offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also
VALUE COUNT INPUT displayed on this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero.
(T series) Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by
hand. The relative position display at this point shows difference between
the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display
value is then set as offset amounts.
17.11 By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate

system from a programmed workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece
DIRECT INPUT OF zero point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
WORKPIECE ORIGIN matches the actual measurement.
OFFSET VALUE
MEASURED
190
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO
18 CUSTOM MACRO
191
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
18.1 A function covering a group of instructions is stored in the memory like

the sub program. The stored function is represented by one instruction
CUSTOM MACRO and is executed by simply writing the represented instruction. The group
of instructions registered is called the custom macro body, and the
representative instruction, the custom macro instruction.
Ordinary program
Custom macro body
A group of
instructions
Custom macro instruction for a certain
function
The programmer need not remember all the instructions in the custom
macro body. He needs only to remember the representative, custom
macro instruction.
The greatest feature in custom macro is that variables can be used in the
custom macro body. Operation between the variables can be done, and
actual values can be set in the variables by custom macro instructions.
Custom macro body

O9011
;
G65 P9011 A10 I5

X#1 Z#4 ;
Variables, #1, #4
Call custom macro body can be used
9011, and set variables instead of unknown
#1=10, #4=5. move amount.
r b
a
Bolt hole circle as shown above can be programmed easily. Program a

custom macro body of a bolt hole circle; once the custom macro body is
stored, operation can be performed as if the CNC itself has a bolt hole
circle function. The programmer need only to remember the following
command, and the bolt hole circle can be called any time.
192
Format
G65 Pp Rr Aa Bb Kk ;
p : Macro number of the bolt hole circle

r : Radius
a : Initial angle
b : Angle between holes
k : Number of holes
With this function, the CNC can be graded up by the user himself. Custom
macro bodies may be offered to the users by the machine tool builder, but
the users still can make custom macro himself.
The following functions can be used for programming the custom macro
body.
Explanations
D Use of Variable Variables: #1 (i=1, 2, 3,.......)
Quotation of variables: F#33 (#33: speed expressed by variables)
D Operation between Various operation can be done between variables and constants.
variables The following operands, and functions can be used:
+ (sum), – (difference), * (product), / (quotient), OR (logical sum), XOR
(exclusive logical sum), AND (logical product), SIN (sine), COS
(cosine), TAN (tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square roots), ABS
(absolute value), BIN (conversion from BCD to binary), BCD
(conversion from binary to BCD), FIX (truncation below decimal point),
FUP (raise fractions below decimal point), ROUND (round)
Example : #5 = SIN [[#2 + #4] : 3.14 + #4] : ABS (#10)
D Control command Program flow in the custom macro body is controlled by the following
command.
- If [<conditional expression>]GOTO n (n = sequence number)
When <conditional expression> is satisfied, the next execution is done
from block with sequence number n.
When <conditional expression> is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
When the [<IF conditional expression>] is committed, it executes
from block with n unconditionally.
The following <conditional expressions> are available:
#j EQ #k whether #j = #k
#j NE #k whether #j = #k
#j GT #k whether #j > #k
#j LT #k whether #j < #k
#j GE #k whether #j y #k
#j LE #k whether #j x #k
- IF[<conditional expression>]THEN
If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a predetermined
macro statement is executed. Only a single macro statement is
executed.
193
- WHILE (<conditional expression>) DO m (m = 1, 2, 3)

:
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks from DO m to
END m is repeated.
When <conditional expression> is no more satisfied, it is executed
from the block next to
END m block.
Example
#120 = 1 ;
WHILE [#120 LE 10] DO 1 ;
Repeated 10 times.
#120=#120+1 ;
END
D Format of custom macro The format is the same as the sub program.
body
O Macro number ;
Custom macro body
M99 ;
D Custom macro
instruction - Simple call
G65 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)
<argument assignment> ;
A value is set to a variable by <argument assignment>.
Write the actual value after the address.
Example A5.0E3.2M13.4
There is a regulation on which address (A - Z) corresponds to which
variable number.
- Modal call A
G66 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)
<argument assignment> ;
Each time a move command is executed, the specified custom macro
body is called. This can be canceled by G67.
This function is useful when drilling cycles are programmed as custom
macro bodies.
194
- Macro call by G codes

The macro can also be called by the parameter-set G codes. Instead
of commanding:
N_ G65 Pffff <argument assignment> ;
macro can be called just by commanding:
N_ Gxx <argument assignment> ;.
G code for calling the macro, and macro program number **** to be
called, are coupled together and set as parameter.
Maximum ten G codes from G01 to G9999 can be used for macro call
(G00 cannot be used).
The G code macro call cannot be used in the macro which was called
by a G code. It also cannot be used in sub programs called by sub
program call with M codes or T codes.
- Macro call by M code
Custom macros can be called by pre-determined M codes which are
set by parameters.
The following command
N_ G65 Pffff <Argument assignment> ;
is equivalent to the following command:
N_ Mxx <Argument assignment> ;
The correspondence between M codes (Mxx) and program number
(delta delta delta delta) of a macro shall be set by a parameter.
Signal MF and M code are not sent out the same as the subprogram call
by M code.
Also when this M code is specified in a program called a macro calling
G code or a subprogram calling M or T code, the M code is regarded
as a normal M code.
Up to ten M codes from M01 to M99999999 can be used for custom
macro calling M codes.
- Sub program call by M code
An M code can be set by parameter to call a sub program. Instead of
commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … M98 Pffff ; ,
the same operation can be performed simply by commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … Mxx ;.
As for M98, M codes are not transmitted.
The M code XX for calling the sub program and the sub program
number delta delta delta delta to be called are coupled together and set
by parameter.
Maximum ten M codes from M01 to M99999999 can be used for
macro call.
Arguments cannot be transmitted. It also cannot be commanded in the
same block as the block with M98 command.
When these M codes are commanded in macro called by G code or in
subprogram called by M code or T code, they are regarded as ordinary
M codes.
195
- Sub program call by T code

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by T codes. When
commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … Tt ; ,
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#149 = t;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … M98 P9000; .
The T type code t is stored as arguments of common variable #149.
This command cannot be done in the same block with a sub program
calling M code, or with M98 command. The T code is not output.
When T code is commanded in macros called by G code, or in sub
programs called by M codes or T codes, the T code is treated as
ordinary T codes.
D Types of variables Variables are divided into local variables, common variables, and system
variables, according to their variable numbers. Each type has different use
and nature.
- Local variables #1 – #33
Local variables are variables used locally in the macro. Accordingly,
in case of multiples calls (calling macro B from macro A), the local
variable used in macro A is never destroyed by being used in macro
B.
- Common variables #100 – #199, #500 – #999
Compared with local variables used locally in a macro, common
variables are common throughout the main program, each sub
program called from the main program, and each macro. The common
variable #1 used in a certain macro is the same as the common variable
#i used in other macros. Therefore, a common variable #1 calculated
in a macro can be used in any other macros.
Common variables #100 to #199 are cleared when power is turned off,
but common variables #500 to #999 are not cleared after power is
turned off.
- System variables
A variable with a certain variable number has a certain value. If the
variable number is changed, the certain value is also changed.
The certain value are the following:
Z 16 points DI (for read only)
Z 48 points DO (for output only)
Z Tool offset amount, workpiece origin offset amount
Z Position information (actual position, skip position, block end
position, etc.)
Z Modal information (F code, G code for each group, etc.)
Z Alarm message (Set alarm number and alarm message, and the
CNC is set in an alarm status. The alarm number and message is
displayed.)
Z A date (year, month, day) and time (hour, minute, second) are
indicated.
Z Clock (Time can be known. A time can also be preset.)
Z Single block stop, Miscellaneous function end wait hold
Z Feed hold, Feed rate override, Exact stop inhibition
Z The number of machining parts is indicated. It can be preset.
196
D External output Value of variables or characters can be output to external devices via the
commands reader/puncher interface with custom macro command. Results in
measurement is output using custom macro.
D Limitations
- Usable variables
See “Types of variables”.
- Usable variable values
Maximum : ±1047
Minimum : ±10-29
- Constants usable in <expression>
Maximum : ±99999999
Minimum : ±0.0000001
Decimal point allowed
- Arithmetic precision
8-digit decimal number
- Macro call nesting
Maximum 4 folds.
- Repeated ID numbers
1-3
- ( ) nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
- Sub program call nesting
8 folds (including macro call nesting)
197
18.2 The range of common variables can be used to #100 to #199, and #500
to #999.
ADDITION OF
CUSTOM MACRO
COMMON
VARIABLES
18.3 When custom macro interruption signal is input during automatic

operation, the block currently under execution is interrupted and the
INTERRUPTION TYPE specified custom macro is activated. After execution of this custom
CUSTOM MACRO macro, it returns to the interrupted block and continues execution of the
remaining commands.
:
M96P_ ;
: When custom macro interruption signal is input between M96 block
and M97 block, custom macro specified by P is activated.
M97;
:
This function enables implementation of an application of detecting a

broken tool, entering a custom macro interrupt signal, executing a tool
change cycle using the custom macro, and then restarting machining after
the tool change.
198
18.4 With this function, custom macro interruption signal can be input on
detection of tool break, tool change cycle can be executed by custom
PATTERN DATA macro, and machining is continued.
INPUT This function simplifies program creation for CNC machining. Instead of
programming in the NC format, the program can be created by selecting
a menu and entering data according to the menu displayed on the CRT
screen. A menu is provided for each type of drilling such as boring and
tapping. A programmer can select data necessary for actual machining
from these menus. Machining data such as hole position and hole depth
is also provided in menus. The programmer can create a program simply
by entering data from the menus.
This function is basically executed by the custom macro created by a
machine tool builder. What menus and machining data to prepare totally
depends on a machine tool builder. Therefore, a machine tool builder can
incorporate their own know-how into this function.
MENU:HOLE PATTERN O9505 N0001
1. TAPPING
2. DRILLING
3. BORING
4. POCKET
5. BOLT HOLE
6. LINEANGLE
7. GRID
8. PECK
9.
10.
>_ S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 15:56:32
[ MACRO ][ MENU ][ OPR ][ ][(OPRT) ]
Pattern menu display
5 is selected
VAR. : BOLT HOLE O9505 N0001

NO. NAME DATA COMMENT
500 TOOL 0.000
501 KIJUN X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE
502 KIJUN Y 0.000 CIRCLE*
503 RADIUS 0.000 SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL 0.000 DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO. 0.000 NO.500–505.
506 0.000
507 0.000
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
X 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 15:56:32
[OFFSET ][SETING ][ ][ ][(OPRT) ]
Pattern data display
199
18.5 There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are
scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type.
MACRO EXECUTOR The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are
FUNCTION machining programs. If programs of these types are executed
simultaneously, a battery may run out or the custom macro may be
destroyed by error operation.
Such problems can be solved by this function. The custom macro created
by a machine tool builder is converted to an execute-form program, be
cataloged in the Flash ROM module, and be executed.
Features
- Since the program is cataloged after converted to an execute-form
program, the execution speed is high. The machining time is then
reduced, and the precision is improved.
- Since the program is cataloged in Flash ROM, there is no problem of
battery extinction or custom macro destruction by error operation. The
reliability is improved.
- Since the cataloged program is not displayed on a program screen, the
know-how of the machine tool builder is protected.
- Since the custom macro is cataloged in Flash ROM, the program edit
memory can be used efficiently.
- The user can call the macro easily without knowing the cataloged
program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program
edit memory as usual.
- An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend
the control function by using such functions as machining program
creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC
data read/write functions.
NOTE
To use the macro executor function for graphics display, the
graphics function is required.
200
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 19. SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT
19 SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT
201
19. SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
19.1 Memory operation of a program created for the following function in the
Series 10/11 tape format can be performed based on the setting parameter.
SERIES–10/11 TAPE
D Equal–lead threading (G33) (T series) ... (G32 with G code system A)
FORMAT
D Subprogram call (M98)
D Canned cycle (G77, G78, G79) (T series) ... (G90, G92, and G94 with
G code system A)
D Multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 to G76) (T series)
D Canned cycle for drilling (G80 to G85) (T series)
D Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89) (M series)
NOTE
Address and value specification range
The restrictions imposed on the Series 0i format are also
imposed on the value specification range for the basic
addresses. When a specified value exceeds the range of
the Series 0i format, a P/S alarm is issued. The use of
addresses may be restricted in some cases.
202
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION CUTTING
20 FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING
203
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
20.1 T series This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this
function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the
ADVANCED PREVIEW servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be
CONTROL (G08) suppressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when advanced preview control mode is
entered.
Format
G08 P_ ;
P1 : Turn on advanced preview control mode.

P0 : Turn off advanced preview control mode.
In advanced preview control mode, the following functions are available :

D Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
D Automatic corner deceleration function
20.2 M series By taking full advantage of high–precision contour control using a RISC
processor, this function enables high–speed high–precision machining
AI ADVANCED without the need for special hardware.
PREVIEW CONTROL
(G05.1) (M series) The function enables look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation of up to 15 blocks. This results in smooth acceleration/
deceleration over many blocks, as well as high–speed machining.
Format
G05.1 Q_ ;
Q1 : Start AI advanced preview control mode

Q0 : End AI advanced preview control mode
G05.1 A block for specifying G05.1 must not contain any other
command.
AI advanced preview control mode can also be canceled
by a reset.
204
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION CUTTING
20.3 M series By taking full advantage of high–precision contour control using a RISC
processor, this function enables high–speed high–precision machining
AI CONTOUR without the need for special hardware.
CONTROL (G05.1) (M
series) The function enables look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation of up to 40 blocks (Series 0i-MC only). This results in
smooth acceleration/deceleration over many blocks, as well as
high–speed machining.
Format
G05.1 Q_ ;
Q1 : Start AI contour control mode

Q0 : End AI contour control mode
G05.1 A block for specifying G05.1 must not contain any other
command.
AI contour control mode can also be canceled by a reset.
205
21. AXIS CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
21 AXIS CONTROL
206
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 21. AXIS CONTROL
21.1 Normally, the machine is controlled to move to a commanded position.

However, when the follow up function is applied, actual position in the
FOLLOW UP CNC is revised according to the move of the machine.
FUNCTION Follow up function is activated when:
- Emergency stop is on
Because machine movement during the emergency stop is reported, the
actual position of the machine is reflected in the CNC. Therefore,
machining can be resumed after the emergency stop has been deactivated,
without performing the reference point return again.
However, when a trouble has generated in the position detection system,
the system cannot follow up correctly. So present position in CNC does
not become correct value.
By input signal (follow up signal) from PMC follow up function can also
be applied to:
- Servo off
status. It is also valid in cases when the machine is moved with a
mechanical handle.
21.2 It is possible to move the machine by hand, using the mechanical handle
installed on the machine; not by the NC (servo motor).
MECHANICAL Move distance by the mechanical handle is followed up and actual
HANDLE FEED position in The NC is revised. The mechanical handle feed is done by
inputting the servo off signal of the axis fed. It is necessary, however, to
specify following up of the movement in the servo off status with the
follow up signal.
21.3 Servo on/off control per axis is possible by input signals from PMC. This
function is generally used with the machine clamp.
SERVO OFF
21.4 The MDI-commanded or the program-commanded move direction of

each axis can be reversed and executed.
MIRROR IMAGE Mirror image is set by MDI setting or by input signals from PMC.
Mirror image can be applied to each axis.
21.5 It is possible to detach or attach rotary tables and attachments with this
function. Switch control axis detach signal according to whether the
CONTROL AXIS rotary tables and attachments are attached or detached. When this signal
DETACH is on, the corresponding axis is excluded from the control axes, so the
servo alarm applied to the axis are ignored. The axis is automatically
regarded as being interlocked. This signal is not only accepted when
power turned is on, so automatic change of attachments is possible any
time with this function.
The same switching as with this signal can also be performed with the
MDI setting.
207
21.6 An input signal from PMC can be used to select whether simple
synchronization control is performed. During simple synchronization
SIMPLE control, the move command for the master axis is issued to the two motors
SYNCHRONOUS of the master and slave axes for synchronization control of the two axes.
CONTROL However, there are no functions for performing synchronization
compensation so that the positional deviations of the master and slave
axes are equalized by constantly monitoring these positional deviations.
Even during simple synchronization control, pitch error compensation
and backlash compensation for the master axis are performed separately
from those for the slave axis.
The following shows the differences in simple synchronization control
between the M series and the T series.
For M series
D Operation modes that allow simple synchronization control
Automatic operation, Jog feed, Manual handle feed,
Incremental feed, and Manual reference position return
D Number of synchronized pairs
Up to four (depending on the number of control axes)
D Other functions
Synchronization error check (positional deviation/machine
coordinates)
Synchronization (During power–up of the CNC, the departure
generated during power–down of the CNC is automatically
compensated. However, the absolute–position detectors are required
for the master and slave axes.)
Automatic grid positioning
Torque difference alarm
For T series
D Operation modes that allow simple synchronization control
Automatic operation only (disabled during manual operation)
D Number of synchronized pairs
One
D Other functions
None
208
21.7 M series The rotation axis (C axis) can be controlled by commanding the G41.1 or
G42.1 so that the tool constantly faces the direction perpendicular to the
NORMAL DIRECTION advancing direction during cutting.
CONTROL
(G40.1,G41.1,G42.1)
(M series)
Format
G40.1 : Normal direction control cancellation mode
(No normal direction control can be performed.)
G41.1 : Normal direction control left side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the left)
G42.1 : Normal direction control right side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the right)
In the normal direction control, control is made so that the tool may be
perpendicular to the advancing direction on the X-Y plane.
With the angle of C axis, the +X direction is defined to be 0 degrees
viewed from the rotation center of C axis. Then, the +Y direction, –X
direction, and –Y direction are defined to be 90, 180, and 270 degrees,
respectively.
When shifting to the normal direction control mode from the cancellation
mode, the C axis becomes perpendicular to the advancing direction where
the G41.1 or G42.1 is at the starting point of commanded block.
+Y
90°
180° 0° +X
Rotation 270°
center
Between blocks, the traveling of C axis is automatically inserted so that

the C axis faces the normal direction at the starting point of each block
according to the change of traveling direction.
Normal direction control is performed for the path after compensation
during the cutter compensation mode. The feed rate of rotation of C axis
inserted at the starting point of each block becomes the federate set by
parameters. However, when dry run is valid, the feed rate is set to the dry
run rate. Also, in the case of rapid traverse (G00), it becomes the rapid
traverse rate. In the case of circular command, the C axis is allowed to
be rotated first so that the C axis faces perpendicular to the circular starting
point. At this time, the C axis is controlled so that it constantly faces the
normal direction along with the move of circular command.
209
NOTE
The rotation of C axis during normal direction control is
controlled at short distance so that 180 degrees or less may
result.
210
21.8 T series A polygonal figure can be machined by turning the workpiece and tool
at a certain ratio.
POLYGON TURNING D Rotation ratio of the workpiece and tool
(G50.2, G51.2) D Number of tool teeth
(T series) The polygon can be a quadrilateral or hexagon according to the above
machining conditions.
Compared with the machining performed by using C and X axes with
polar-coordinate compensation, this machining requires shorter time. It,
however, cannot form a precise figure of a polygon. Generally, this
method is used for machining of square or hexagonal bolt heads or
hexagonal nuts.
Example)
Rotation ratio of the workpiece and tool : 1 : 2
Number of teeth : Three at every 120° (for a hexagon)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Tool
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ Workpiece
The rotation of the tool for polygon turning is controlled by the CNC
control axis. Hereafter, the rotation axis of this tool is called B axis.
Command G51.2 controls the B axis so that the ratio of the tool speed to
the speed of the workpiece (specified by the S command beforehand)
attached to the spindle becomes the specified value.
The synchronization between the spindle and B axis is canceled by the
command below.
G50.2 ;
211
Format
G51.2 P_ Q_ ;
P and Q : Rotation ratio of spindle to B axis
Command range : Integer value of 1 to 9 for both P and Q
When the value of Q is positive, the rotation direction of B
axis is in positive direction.
When the value of Q is negative, the rotation direction of B
axis is in negative direction.
(Example) When the rotation ratio of spindle to B axis is equal to 1 : 2
and the rotation direction of B axis is positive direction
G51.2 P1 Q2 ;
G50.2 ; Cancel
When synchronous start is commanded by the G51.2, one rotation signal

from the position coder mounted in the spindle is detected and the rotation
of B axis is controlled while being synchronous with the rate of spindle
in response to the rotation ratio (P : Q). Namely, control is made so that
the ratio of spindle to B axis is P : Q. This relationship continues until
the synchronous cancellation command (G50.2 or reset) are carried out.
The direction of rotation of B axis is determined by the symbol Q and is
not affected by the direction of rotation of position coder.
When the G50.2 is commanded, the synchronization of the spindle and
B axis is canceled and the B axis is stopped.
212
21.9 The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
AXIS CONTROL WITH CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying movimg
PMC distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input
signal provided for that particular axis.
The PMC can directly control the following operations :
(1) Rapid traverse with moving distance specified
(2) Cutting feed–feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(3) Cutting feed–feed per revolution, with moving distance specified
(4) Skip–feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(5) Dwell
(6) Continuons feed
(7) Reference position return
(8) 1st reference position return
(9) 2nd reference position return
(10) 3rd reference position return
(11) 4th reference position return
(12) External pulse synchronization–Main spindle
(13) External pulse synchronization–first manual handle
(14) External pulse synchronization–second manual handle
(15) External pulse synchronization–third manual handle (for M series
only)
(16) Feedrate control
(17) Auxiliary function, Auxliary function 2, Auxliary function 3
(18) Selection of the machine coordinate system
(19) Torque control command
The PMC is provided with four paths to control these operations using
input and output signals.
By issuing commands through these four paths, the PMC can
simultaneously control multiple axes separately. Use parameter to
determine which path controls which axis. Commands may be issued
through one path to two or more axes, thus allowing the PMC to control
multiple axes using one path.
213
21.10 For T series, even if the X axis is not vertical to the Z axis (for T series,
the Y axis not vertical to the Z axis), they are assumed to form a
ANGULAR AXIS orthogonal coordinate system, simplifying programming. The movement
CONTROL of each axis is automatically controlled according to the slant angle.
Command
Machine movement
X’ X Y’ Y
θ θ
Z Z
For T series For M series
21.11 With arbitrary angular axis control, however, any axes can be specified
as the angular and perpendicular axes, by specifying parameters
ARBITRARY accordingly.
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL
21.12 When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only
one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis.
TANDEM CONTROL Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The sub motor is used
only to produce torque. With this tandem control function, the torque
produced can be doubled.
Main motor
Table
Ball screw
Sub motor
Example of operation
In general, the CNC regards tandem control as being performed for one
axis. However, for servo parameter management and servo alarm
monitoring, tandem control is regarded as being performed for two axes.
214
21.13 This function can be used to suppress vibrations caused by interference

between the main axis and the sub axis in position tandem (quick
TANDEM synchronization) control.
DISTURBANCE
ELIMINATION NOTE
CONTROL 1 The function can only be used for two–axis quick
synchronization control. It cannot be used for multiaxis
quick synchronization control.
2 In a servo axis arrangement, the main axis must be placed
on an odd–numbered axis and the sub axis must be placed
on an even–numbered axis adjacent to the main axis.
3 The function cannot be used for a mechanism in which a
mechanical connection between two axes can be released.
21.14 In a closed loop system equipped with a built–in absolute position

detector (serial pulse coder) and incremental linear scale, a coordinate
TEMPORARY system is established at power–up by using absolute position data from
ABSOLUTE the built–in absolute position detector. The subsequent position control
COORDINATE is performed using incremental data of the linear scale. Since the position
immediately after power–up is a temporary position, manual reference
SETTING
position return is needed to obtain a correct position.
When this function is used, a stroke limit check is enabled even before
reference position return, although the position at power–up is an
approximate position. Note that this function does not use the
incremental linear scale as an absolute position detector.
This function is optional.
CNC
Absolute position detection at power–up
Linear scale
Serial pulse coder (incremental)
(absolute position detector)
Ordinary position control
Fig. 21.14 System using the temporary coordinate setting function
215
22. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
22 MANUAL OPERATION
216
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 22. MANUAL OPERATION
22.1
JOG FEED D Jog feed
Each axis can be moved in the + or - direction for the time the button
is pressed. Feed rate is the parameter set speed with override of:
0 - 655.34%, 0.01% step.
The parameter set speed can be set to each axis.
D Manual rapid feed
Each axis can be fed in a rapid feed to the + or - direction for the time
the button is pressed.
Rapid traverse override is also possible.
22.2 Specified move amount can be positioned to the + or - direction with the
button.
INCREMENTAL FEED Move amount of:
(least command increment) x (magnification)
can be specified. The feed rate is that of manual feed.
The possible magnifications to be specified are as follows.
×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000.
Increment system Metric input Inch input
IS–B 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01
22.3 By rotating the manual pulse generator, the axis can be moved for the
equivalent distance. Manual handle feed is controlled 1 axis at a time.
MANUAL HANDLE The manual pulse generator generates 100 pulses per rotation. Move
FEED (1ST) amount per pulse can be specified from the following magnifications:
×1, ×10, ×M, ×N.
N is parameter set values of 0 - 1000. M is parameter set values of 1–127.
Move distance is :
(Least command increment) x (magnification)
Increment system Metric input Inch input
IS–B 0.001, 0.01, M/1000, 0.0001, 0.001, M/10000,

N/1000 mm N/10000 inch
IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, M/10000, 0.00001, 0.0001, M/100000,

N/1000 mm N/100000 inch
22.4 A 2nd, as well as 3rd manual pulse generator can be rotated to move the
axis for the equivalent distance. Manual handle feed of 3 axes (for T
MANUAL HANDLE series, 2 axes) can be done at a time. Multiplier is common to 1st, 2nd
FEED (2ND, 3RD) and 3rd manual pulse generators.
(T SERIES: 2ND)
217
22. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
22.5 Although manual handle feed is usually enabled only in the manual
handle-feed mode, it can also be performed in the manual continuous-feed
JOG AND HANDLE mode by setting the corresponding parameters. However, manual
SIMULTANEOUS continuous-feed and manual handle-feed cannot be performed
MODE simultaneously. Manual handle-feed can be performed only when manual
continuous-feed is in progress (i.e., an axis is moving).
22.6 T series The feedrates in jog feed and incremental feed can be specified by
inputting either feed distance per minute or feed distance per rotation.
MANUAL
PER–REVOLUTION 1 Specification of feed distance per minute or feed distance
FEED (T series) per rotation is selected by setting the corresponding
parameter.
2 During manual rapid traverse, feed distance per minute is
always specified.
22.7 When tool is moved by manual operation, whether to add the move
distance to the absolute coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate
MANUAL ABSOLUTE system is selected depending on the input signal *ABSM.
ON/OFF When tool is moved by manual operation when *ABSM is set to 0, the
move distance is added to the absolute coordinate value.
When tool is moved by manual operation when *ABSM is set to 1, the
move distance is ignored, and is not added to the absolute coordinate
value. In this case, the work coordinates is shifted for the amount tool was
moved by manual operation.
218
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 23. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
23 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
219
23. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
23.1
OPERATION MODE
23.1.1 The part program can be read and executed block by block from the input
DNC Operation device connected to the reader/puncher interface.
23.1.2 Program registered in the memory can be executed.

Memory Operation
23.1.3 Multiple blocks can be input and executed by the MDI unit.
MDI Operation
220
23.2
SELECTION OF
EXECUTION
PROGRAMS
23.2.1 Program number currently in need can be searched from the programs
Program Number registered in memory operating the MDI.
Search
23.2.2 The sequence number of the program on the currently selected memory
Sequence Number can be searched using the MDI unit.
When executing the program from half-way (not from the head) of the
Search program, specify the sequence number of the half-way program, and the
program can be executed from the half-way block by sequence number
search.
23.2.3 After program execution has ended, the program in the memory or the
tape reader can be reminded to the program head, with this reset & rewind
Rewind
signal on. (When a portable tape reader with reels is in use)
23.2.4 By specifying workpiece numbers of 01 - 15 externally (from the machine

side, etc.), program corresponding to the workpiece number can be
External Workpiece
selected.
Number Search The workpiece number equals the program number. For example when
workpiece number 12 is specified, program, O0012 is selected.
23.2.5 The external workpiece number search function has been expanded. A
Expanded External workpiece number 0001 to 9999 can be specified to select a program
(O0001 to O9999) corresponding to the workpiece number.
Workpiece Number
Search
221
23.3
ACTIVATION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
23.3.1 Set operation mode to memory operation, MDI operation, or DNC

Cycle Start operation, press the cycle start button, and automatic operation starts.
23.4
EXECUTION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
23.4.1 Buffer register in CNC equivalent to one block is available for program
Buffer Register read and control of CNC command operation intervals caused by
preprocess time.
222
23.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP
23.5.1 Automatic operation is stopped after executing the M00 (program stop)
commanded block. When the optional stop switch on the operator’s panel
Program Stop
is turned on, the M01 (optional stop) commanded block is executed and
(M00, M01) the automatic operation stops.
The automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.
23.5.2 The CNC is reset after executing the M02 (end of program) or M30 (end
Program End of tape) commanded block.
(M02, M30)
23.5.3 During program operation, when the block with a preset sequence number
Sequence Number appears, operation stops after execution of the block, to a single block stop
status. The sequence number can be set by the operator through the MDI
Comparison and Stop panel. This function is useful for program check, etc., because program
can be stopped at optional block without changing the program.
23.5.4 The CNC can be brought to an automatic operation hold status by pressing
Feed Hold the feed hold button on the operator’s panel. When feed hold is
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.
Automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.
23.5.5 T series When feed hold is commanded during thread cutting cycle by G76 or
Thread Cutting Cycle G78, the tool rapidly relieves to the cycle start point, like in the final
chamfering of the thread cutting cycle. Thread cutting cycle restarts by
Retract (T series) cycle start command.
Without this function, if feed hold is commanded during thread cutting,
it returns and stops at the position where thread cutting circle was started
after thread cutting is ended.
Rapid traverse Stop point

Rapid
traverse
Chamfering
Ordinary cycle
Move with feed hold
Feed hold was applied here
23.5.6 The automatic operation can be ended in a reset status by the reset button
Reset on the MDI panel or by the external reset signal, etc. When reset is
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.
223
23.6
RESTART OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
23.6.1 This function allows program restart by specifying the desired sequence
Program Restart number, for example after tool break and change, or when machining is
restarted after holidays. The NC memorizes the modal status from the
beginning of the program to the sequence number.
If there are M codes necessary to be output, output the M code by the MDI,
press the start button, the tool automatically moves to the start position,
and the program execution restarts.
23.6.2 In cases such as when tool movement along an axis is stopped by feed hold
Manual Intervention during automatic operation so that manual intervention can be used to
replace the tool: When automatic operation is restarted, this function
and Return returns the tool to the position where manual intervention was started.
To use the conventional program restart function and tool withdrawal and
return function, the switches on the operator’s panel must be used in
conjunction with the MDI keys. This function does not require such
operations.
23.7
MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
DURING AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
23.7.1 During automatic operation, tool can be adjusted by the manual pulse
Handle Interruption generator without changing the mode. The pulse from the manual pulse
generator is added to the automatic operation command and the tool is
moved for the recommended pulses.
The work coordinate system thereafter is shifted for the pulse commanded
value. Movement commanded by handle interruption can be displayed.
224
23.8 Any of the files (programs) stored on a FANUC Handy File, a FANUC
Program File Mate, a FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE can be selected and
SCHEDULING executed.
FUNCTION D A list of the files stored on the Floppy Cassette can be displayed.
D Files can be executed in an arbitrary order and executed an arbitrary
number of times by specifying file numbers in a desired order along
with their repeat counts.
File list screen
FILE DIRECTORY F0004 N00020

CURRENT SELECTED:O0002
NO. FILE NAME (METER) VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 1.9
0004 O0002 1.9
0005 O0003 1.9
0006 O0004 1.9
0007 O0005 1.9
0008 O0010 1.9
RMT **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ SELECT ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
Schedule screen (for specifying file numbers and repeat counts)
FILE DIRECTORY F0000 N00020

ORDER FILE NO. REQ.REP CUR.REP
01 0001 2 0
02 0007 25 0
03 0008 6 0
04 0011 9999 0
05 0012 LOOP 0
06
07
08
09
10
>_
RMT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PRGRM ][ ][ DIR ][ SCHDUL ][ (OPRT) ]
225
23.9 M series When rigid tapping is stopped, either by an emergency stop or by a reset,
the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn
RETRACTION FOR out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores
RIGID TAPPING (M information relating to the tapping executed most recently. When a tap
series) return signal is input, only the rigid tapping cycle return operation is
executed, based on the stored information. The tap is pulled toward the
R point. When a return value a is set in a corresponding parameter, the
pulling distance can be increased by a.
Initial point
2nd return
completion
α point
Return 1st return

completion completion
R point point α point
L L
Center of
tapping
Z point (α = 0) (when α is set)
23.9.1 Instead of signal input, a G30 command can be used to start rigid tapping
Retraction for Rigid return. This is made possible by parameter setting.
Tapping by Specifying
G30
Format
G30 P99 M29 S_ ;
M29 : A parameter–set M code that specifies rigid tapping
S_ : Specify S used when rigid tapping is specified. (Optional)
NOTE
1 When use of G30 is selected, rigid tapping return cannot be
performed by signal input.
2 The rigid tapping return command is a one–shot command.
226
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 24. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS
24 PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS
227
24. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
24.1 In machine lock condition, the machine does not move, but the position
display is updated as if the machine were moving. Machine lock is valid
ALL-AXES MACHINE even in the middle of a block.
LOCK
24.2 Machine lock can be commanded per axis.

MACHINE LOCK ON
EACH AXIS
24.3 This function inhibits transmitting of M, S, T, B function code signals and

strobe signals to PMC. Miscellaneous functions M00, M01, M02, and
AUXILIARY M30 are executed even when miscellaneous function lock is applied,
FUNCTION LOCK allowing the code signal, strobe signal, and decode signal to be
transmitted normally.
24.4 In the dry run mode, the tool moves at the speed obtained by multiplying
the dry run speed by the override value for manual feeding, regardless of
DRY RUN the specified cutting federate. The dry run speed is specified in the
corresponding parameter. However, the rapid traverse command (G00)
and rapid traverse override value are effective.
Dry run can also be commanded to rapid feed command (G00) by
parameter setting.
24.5 The program can be executed block by block under automatic operation.
SINGLE BLOCK
228
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 25. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT
25 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT
229
25. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
25.1 The setting and display units are shown in Subsections II–25.1.1 to
II–25.1.4.
SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT
7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type) . . II–25.1.1
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type) . . . . . . . . . II–25.1.2
7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type) . . . . . II–25.1.3
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type) . . . . . . . . . . . II–25.1.4
25.1.1
7.2″ Monochrome
LCD/MDI Unit
(Horizontal Type)
NOTE
The MDI varies between the T series and the M series.
230
25.1.2
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI
Unit (Horizontal Type)
NOTE
231
25. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
25.1.3
7.2″ Monochrome
LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical
Type)
NOTE
232
25.1.4
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI
Unit (Vertical Type)
NOTE
233
26. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
26 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA
234
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 26. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA
26.1 The following data are displayed.

DISPLAY
D Indication of statuses The status of the control unit is indicated on the screen. Statuses include
and tool post names the state when an alarm is being activated or when the system is in the edit
mode. The status line is displayed right above the soft key line.

––EMG–– OUTPUT

Status
EDIT STOP MTN FIN ALM hh:mm:ss HEAD1 line
Soft key
line
Operation mode (MDI, MEM, RMT, EDIT, HND, TJOG, THND,

INC, or REF)
Status of automatic operation (STOP, HOLD, STRT, or ****)
***** : Reset
STOP : Automatic operation is in a stopped state.
HOLD : Automatic operation is in a halt state.
STRT : Automatic operation has been started.
Axis movement/dwell (MTN, DWL, or ***)
FIN wait state (FIN or ***)
Emergency stop (--EMG--) (displayed above in 3 and 4)
Alarm status (ALM, WNG, or ***)

Clock (hh:mm:ss)
Name of the path currently selected (only at 2–path control)
NOTE
The name of a path can be specified by the corresponding
parameter with a string of up to seven characters. The characters
may be numbers, letters, katakana characters, or symbols.
Status display such as program editing (INPUT, OUTPUT, SRCH,

EDIT, LSK, or RSTR)
( and are displayed in the same column. When a program is
being edited, is displayed.)
D Key input display Data input via the address keys or the numerical keys are displayed at the
left lower part of the screen.
D Program number, Program number, sequence number is displayed on the right upper part
sequence number of the screen.
display
D Alarm display Alarm number and its contents are displayed briefly.
D Alarm message display Alarm message contents are displayed.
D Present position display Relative position and position in the work coordinates are displayed in
3-times magnified characters.
235
D Total position display Relative position, position in the work coordinates, position in the
machine coordinate, and remaining move distance are displayed in one
screen.
D Command value display The following two displays are performed.
- Previously commanded modal value and command value to be
executed (ACTIVE)
- Command value of the next block
D Setting (parameter set by Displays setting value.
the operator) display
D Tool offset amount Displays offset value. Relative position is also displayed at the same time.
display
D Program display - Display of program for editing.
- Display of program currently under execution.
- Display of program list.
A list of program number and program name, of programs stored in
the memory is displayed.
Used memory size and remaining memory size are also displayed.
D Parameter display
D Self diagnosis result
display
D Custom macro variables
display
D External operator
message, external alarm
message display
D Actual speed and actual - Actual feedrate per minute (mm/min or inch/min)
spindle speed Movement along an arbitrary axis can also be excluded from the actual
feedrate indications by parameter setting.
- Actual spindle speed (min–1)
D Program check screen The following are displayed on one screen.
- Program number on execution
- Sequence number on execution
- Program text on execution
- Current position
- Modal G codes
- Modal M codes
- T code
- Actual feedrate and spindle speed
- Status
236
D Operating monitor The load values (torque values) of spindle motor and servo motor are
display displayed in bar chart.
The most recent sampling values are displayed in bar chart display. Set
the rated load value of motor corresponding to each load meter to
parameters. The load meter displays 100% when the load value is the
rated load value.
The load meter can be displayed up to three servo motor axes and a
parameter can be used to select any one of three axes.
D Displaying the alarm A maximum of 25 of the most recent alarms generated in CNC can be
history recorded. Each alarm record consists of the following items:
- Date and time
- Alarm number
- Alarm message
Any of the records can be deleted from the alarm history.
In addition, the operator message history can be displayed.
ALARM HISTORY O0100 N00001
02. 02. 14 16:43:48

010 IMPROPER G–CODE
02. 02. 13 8:22:21
506 OVER TRAVEL :+1
02. 02. 12 20:15:43
417 SERVO ALARM :X AXIS DGTL PARAM
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTORY ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
D Displaying external The history of external operator messages can be stored. The stored
operator message history can be displayed on the external operator message history screen.
history
237
26.2 The Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese,

Korean, Portuguese, Hungarian, Polish, Swedish, and Dutch (M series
LANGUAGE only) are prepared as display languages. Select the language to be
SELECTION displayed by parameters.
26.3 Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display

screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.
CLOCK FUNCTION The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time
will be told through the window at PMC side.
26.4 This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer on the cRT display
RUN TIME & PARTS screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time
NUMBER DISPLAY and timer can be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set M code
is executed, the count of the total in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts reaches the number of parts required,
a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts counted, using MDI.
The number of required parts and the number of counted parts can be read
and written using custom macro variables. These values can also be read
using the external data input function.
SETTING(TIMER) O0000 N00000
PARTS TOTAL = 0
PARTS REQUIRED = 25
PARTS COUNT = 10
POWER ON = 0H 0M
OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
CUTTING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
FREE PURPOSE = 0H 0M 0S
CYCLE TIME = 0H 0M 0S
DATE = 2002/04/10
TIME = 16:20:30
>_
MDI **** *** *** 16:20:30
[ OFFSET ][ SETTING ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
238
26.5 In this function, functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel is

done by operation on the MDI panel. Mode selection and jogging
SOFTWARE override, etc. can be operated by setting operation via the MDI panel with
OPERATOR’S PANEL this function, thus allowing commitance of corresponding switches on the
machine operator’s panel.
This function is valid only when the screen is displayed with operator’s
panel. Move cursor with the cursor operation keys, and select various
operations, viewing the screen.
The following operations can be done via the MDI panel:
A Model selection
B Manual pulse generator feed axis selection (available only with
manual handle 1)
Move distance selection per pulse of manual pulse generator
C Rapid traverse override
Jogging speed override
Feedrate override
D Optional block skip (Block delete)
Single block
Machine lock
Dry run
E Memory protect
F Feed hold
G Jogging/incremental feed axis direction selection
Manual rapid traverse selection
H General-purpose switch: Eight general-purpose switches are provided
and each of these
switches can be named by up to eight alphanumeric characters.
There is a parameter per groups A to G shown above, which decides
validity of operation function by MDI panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000
MODE : MDI AUTO EDIT STEP JOG ZRN
STEP MULT. :
*1 *10 *100
RAPID OVRD. :
100% 50% 25% F0
JOG FEED :1.0%
****************
FEED OVRD. : 140%
******
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
X 0.000 Z 0.000
S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ MACRO ][ ][ OPR ][ TOOLLF ][ ]
239
OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000
BLOCK SKIP : OFF ON

SINGLE BLOCK : OFF ON
MACHINE LOCK : OFF ON
DRY RUN : OFF ON
PROTECT KEY : PROTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD : OFF ON
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

X 0.000 Z 0.000
S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ MACRO ][ ][ OPR ][ TOOLLF ][ ]
240
26.6 File names in the floppy cassette (FANUC CASSETTE F1) and program
file (FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate can be listed on the display
DIRECTORY DISPLAY (directory display). Each file name of up to 17 letters can be displayed
OF FLOPPY in directory display.
CASSETTE Files in the floppy cassette are:
Part program, parameter/pitch error compensation data, tool
compensation data, and etc.
When part program in part program memory is written into the floppy
cassette, program number can be given to it as a file name. When NC
parameter is written into the floppy cassette, “PARAMETER” is given
them as a fixed name. When tool compensation data is written into the
floppy cassette, “OFFSET” is given to it as a fixed name.
DIRECTORY(FLOPPY) O0000 N00000

NO. FILE NAME (METER) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 1.9
0004 O0002 1.9
0005 O0003 1.9
0006 O0004 1.9
0007 O0005 1.9
0008 O0010 1.9
0009 O0020 1.9
EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]
241
26.7
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
FUNCTION
26.7.1 This function allows display of tool path on the screen, making program
Graphic Display check easier. The following functions are offered.
Function D Tool path of the machining program can be displayed. Machining
process can be checked just by viewing the tool path drawing on the
screen.
Program check before machining can be done by displaying the
programmed locus on the screen.
D For M series, display is possible with the XY plane, YZ plane, ZX
plane, or isometric; for T series, with the XZ plane.
D Scaling of the screen is possible.
O0001 N00012
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PARAM ][ GRAPH ][ ][ ][ ]
Graphic display of tool path (M series)
242
26.7.2 Created programs can be checked visually by displaying them using

Dynamic Graphic graphic data.
Display
Dynamic graphic display Graphic data can be displayed in the following two drawing modes:
function (for M series)
D Tool path drawing mode Tool paths are drawn with lines so programs can be checked closely.
D Because tool paths are drawn at a high speed, programs can be checked
quickly.
Two-dimensional drawing
PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ AUTO ][ START ][ STOP ][REWIND ][ ERASE ]
D With the automatic scaling function, figures can be drawn on the center
of the screen at a desired magnification.
D On a drawing, any part of a figure can be magnified easily by
specifying its center and scale.
Enlarged-view drawing
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PARAM ][ EXEC ][ SCALE ][ POS ][ (OPRT) ]
243
D In addition to two-dimensional drawings, isometric projection

drawings and biplanar drawings can be created.
Isometric projection drawing
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
D Because the current position of a tool is marked on the drawn tool path,
the progress of machining can be monitored accurately.
Biplanar drawing
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
244
D Machining profile
drawing mode D The profile of a workpiece that changes as the tool moves can be
simulated and drawn three-dimensionally, making it easier to check
programs visually.
Blank figure
SOLID GRAPHIC (BLANK) O0000 N00000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ANEW ][ + ROT ][ – ROT ][ +TILT ][ –TILT ]
Final figure
SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ A.ST ][ F.ST ][ STOP ][ REWIND ][ ]
245
D The coordinate axes and projection angles can be changed at the

operator’s option.
Modification of a coordinate axis (inclination)
SOLID GRAPHIC (REVIEW) O0000 N00000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

Modification of a coordinate axis (inclination)
SOLID GRAPHIC (REVIEW) O0000 N00000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

246
D In addition to three–dimensional drawings, two–dimensional

drawings and tri–planar drawings can be created.
Two-dimensional drawing
SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ A.ST ][ F.ST ][ STOP ][ REWIND ][ ]
Tri-planar drawing
SOLID GRAPHIC (3–PLANE) O1000 N00630
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ][ ← ][ → ][ ↑ ][ ↓ ]
Dynamic graphic display The following two display modes are available.
function (for T series) These functions are provided for conversational automatic programming
function for lathe.
D Tool path drawing mode Movement of the tool tip is drawn with fine lines.
247
26.8 The waveforms of servo data items (errors, torques, timing pulses, etc.)
and signals between the CNC and the PMC can be displayed.
SERVO WAVEFORM
FUNCTION
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC)) O0000 N00000
MDI **** *** ***

[ START ][ TIME→][ ←TIME][ H–DOBL ][ H–HALF ]
On this screen, the sampling period (6 to 32767 ms) and drawing start
conditions can be specified.
248
26.9
SCREENS FOR
SERVO DATA AND
SPINDLE DATA
26.9.1 On the servo setting screen, parameters required for standard initialization
Servo Setting Screen of the servo motor are listed. The parameters can also be set.
SERVO SETTING O0000 N00000
X AXIS Y AXIS
INITIAL SET BIT 00000011 00000001
MOTOR ID NO. 12 12
AMR 00011111 00011111
CMR 2 2
FEEDGEAR N 3 3
(N/M) M 10 10
DIRECTION SET 111 111
VEROCITY PULSE NO. 8000 8000
POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 8000
REF COUNTER 8000 8000
MDI **** *** *** *** 09:36:48

[ SV.SET ][ SV.TUN ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
26.9.2 On the servo adjustment screen, parameters required for basic adjustment
Servo Adjustment of the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Screen
SERVO SETTING O1000 N00000
X AXIS
(PARAMETR) (MONITOR)
FUNC.BIT 00110100 ALARM 1 00110100
LOOP GAIN 3000 ALRAM 2 00110100
TUNING ST. 1 ALARM 3 00000000
SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000
INT.GAIN 251 LOOP GAIN 3000
PROP.GAIN –2460 POS ERROR 100
FILTER 2450 CURRENT % 50
>_
MEM STAT MTN *** *** 09:36:48
[ SV.SET ][ SV.TUN ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
249
26.9.3 On the spindle setting screen, parameters required for standard

Spindle Setting Screen initialization of the serial spindle are listed. The parameters can also be
set.
SPINDLE SETTING O0000 N00000
GEAR SELECT :1
SPINDLE :S11
(PARAMETER)
GEAR RATIO 50
MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
MAX C AXIS SPEED 100
>_
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ SP.SET ][ SP.TUN ][ SP.MON ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
26.9.4 On the spindle adjustment screen, parameters required for basic

Spindle Adjustment adjustment of the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed.
Screen
SPINDLE TUNING O1000 N00000
OPERATION : SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL

GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN –2460 MOTOR 100
INT.GAIN 241 SPINDLE 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30
ZRN GAIN % 100 SYN.ERROR 128
REF.SHIFT 2046
>_
MEM STAT MTN *** *** 09:36:48
250
26.9.5 On the spindle monitor screen, various data items related to the spindle
Spindle Monitor Screen are listed.
SPINDLE MONITOR O1000 N00000

ALARM : AL–27(PC DISCON.)
OPERATION : SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
FEED SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200(%)
LOAD METER(%)
CONTROL INPUT : MRDY *ESP ORCM
CONTROL OUTPUT : ORAR SST
>_
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
251
26.10 The configurations of software and hardware required for maintenance of

the CNC are displayed.
SYSTEM The system configuration display function provides the following three
CONFIGURATION screens:
DISPLAY FUNCTION D Slot information screen
D Software information screen
D Hardware (module) information screen
Slot information
SYSTEM CONFIG O1234 N56789
SLOT MODULE_ID SERIES VERSION

00 3008 :40 B1H1 0001
01 00CF :66 B435 0001
03 019D :41 4068 0001

MEM **** *** *** 18:46:43

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
Slot No.
Module ID
Software ID
Software series
Software edition
Software information
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE) O1234 N56789
SYSTEM B0H1 0001

BASIC+OPTION–A1
SERVO 90B0 0001
PMC(SYS) 406G 0001
406G 0001
PMC(LAD) FS16 0001
MACRO LIB BZG1 0001
BOOT 60M5 0001
GRAPHIC–1 60V5 0001
GRAPHIC–2 60V6 0001
EMBED ETH 656A 0001

MEM **** *** *** 19:14:23
Software type
Software series
Software edition
Contents of ROM (system ROM only)
252
Hardware (module) The slot number, board name, modules mounted on the board are
information displayed for each slot.
SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE) O1234 N56789

SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD
AXIS CTRL CARD : 08

DISPLAY CTRL CARD : OE
CPU CARD : 11
FROM DIMM : C1
SRAM DIMM : 05
DRAM DIMM : A9
PMC CPU : O1

MEM **** *** *** 19:33:34

Slot number (The slot number corresponds to the number

displayed on the slot information screen.)
Name of the PC board inserted in the slot
Hardware (modules) mounted on the PC board
Types of hardware (modules), mounted/not mounted
253
26.11 When an alarm occurs, or when the operator is not certain what to do next,
HELP FUNCTION pressing the HELP key on the MDI panel displays detailed alarm
information or instructions for operation.
One of the following three screens can be displayed:
D On the alarm detail screen, detailed information on the alarm currently
activated is displayed. Using this information, the operator can
identify the cause of the alarm and what action to take. Any alarm
information can be displayed on this screen.
D On the operation instruction screen, when the operator is not sure of
what to do next during CNC operation (i.e., program editing and data
input/output) necessary instructions are displayed.
D Parameter numbers are listed on the parameter list screen. When the
number of the parameter to be set or referenced is unknown, bring up
this screen.
- An alarm detail screen for when an alarm (P/S 094) is

activated.
HELP (ALARM DETAIL) O1234 N00001
NUMBER: 094
M’SAGE: P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
FUNCTION: RESTART PROGRAM
ALARM:
WHEN COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING IS
CONDUCTED AFTER HOLDING
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, P–TYPE (WHEN TOOL IS
DAMAGED) PROGRAM
RESTART CANNOT BE EXECUTED.
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** ALM 09:36:48
[ ALAM ][ OPR ][ PARA ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
- Parameter list screen
HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N00001

1/4
*SETTING (NO.0000 – )
*READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100 – )
*AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000 – )
*COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200 – )
*STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300 – )
*FEED RATE (NO.1400 – )
*ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600 – )
*SERVO RELATED (NO.1800 – )
*DI/DO (NO.3000 – )
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
254
- Operation instruction screen
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N00001

<<1. PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4
*DELETE ALL PROGRAMS
MODE : EDIT
SCREEN: PROGRAM
OPR : (O–9999) – <DELETE>
*DELETE ONE PROGRAM

MODE : EDIT
SCREEN: PROGRAM
OPR : (O+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
255
26.12 A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection
of various NC data. The following four input signals are offered,
DATA PROTECTION according to type of data to be protected.
KEY D KEY 1
Allows input of tool compensation amount and work zero point offset
amount.
D KEY 2
Allows setting data input and macro variable input.
D KEY 3
Allows part program input and editing.
D KEY 4
Allows PMC data (counter, data table) input.
26.13 This function displays a history of the key and signal operations,
performed by the operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or alarm. The
DISPLAYING history can also be displayed for previously generated alarms.
OPERATION HISTORY The following history data is recorded :
D MDI key/soft key operation sequences
Example : A to Z, <POS>, <PAGE↑>, [SF1]
D On/off status transitions of selected input and output signals
Example : G0000.7↑, SBK↑
D NC alarm information
Example : P/S0010
D Time (date, time) stamp
Example : 02/04/10
09:27:55
The history data can be output to an input/output device, connected via
the reader/punch interface. Previously output history data can be input
from an input/output device.
26.14 The remote diagnosis function allows you to use a commercially available
personal computer as a service terminal and connect it to a CNC via a
REMOTE Ethernet for monitoring the CNC status and modifying CNC data from
DIAGNOSTIC the personal computer.
The machine remote diagnosis package and Ethernet function are
required.
256
26.15 CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped according to their

names, thus enabling the listing and output of CNC programs on a
DIRECTORY DISPLAY group–by–group basis.
AND PUNCH FOR To assign multiple CNC programs to a single group, assign names to those
EACH GROUP programs, beginning each name with the same character string. By
searching through all the program names for a specified character string,
the program numbers and names of all programs having names including
that string are listed.
The CNC programs within a specified group can also be output.
- Group–unit program list screen displayed when a search is made
for “GEAR–1000*”
PROGRAM DIRECTORY(GROUP) O0001 N00010
PROGRAM(NUM.) MEMORY’CHAR.)
–USED: 60 3321
–FREE: 2 429
O0020 (GEAR–1000 MAIN)
O0040 (GEAR–1000 SUB–1)
O0200 (GEAR–1000 SUB–2)
O2000 (GEAR–1000 SUB–3)
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 16:53:25
[ PRGRM ][ DIR ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
26.16 Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes
a LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can
ERASE CRT SCREEN be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to specify the
DISPLAY automatic clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed at specified with
a parameter. (This cannot be performed for 0i with PC functions.)
257
26.17 The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those
consumables that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD
PERIODIC backlight, touch pad, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is
MAINTENANCE indicated by the machine run time or the like.
SCREEN
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345
(STATUS)
ITEM NAME REMAIN
: 01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 0H
@ 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 5000H
03 LCD BACK LIGHT 10000H
@ 04 COOLANT 720H
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT **** *** *** 19:27:05
[ ][MAINTE ][ ][ ][(OPRT) ]
26.18 The history of the maintenance carried out by FANUC service personnel
and machine tool builder can be recorded via the screen. The screen has
MAINTENANCE the following features:
INFORMATION D Alphabetical characters can be input from MDI. (Half–size kana can
SCREEN be input only when Japanese display is selected.)
D The recording screen can be scrolled, line by line.
D Edited maintenance information can be read and punched.
D Data can be stored into flash ROM.
D Full–size (shift JIS) codes can be displayed. (Input codes are read
only.)
258
26.19 Some operators may find the LCD difficult to read, depending on their eye
level relative to the display. To make a monochrome LCD easier to read,
CONTRAST the contrast can be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT
SCREEN
SETTING(HANDY)
PARAMETER WRITE =1(0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE)

TV CHECK =0(0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE =0(0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT =0(O:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL =0(0–3:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. =0(0:OFF 1:ON)
TAPE FORMAT =0(0:NO CNV 1:F15)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(PROGRAM NO.)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(SEQUENCE NO.)
CONTRAST (+=[ON:1] –=[OFF:0])

>
MDI **** *** *** BAT 00:00:00
[NO.SRH ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][+INPUT ][ INPUT ]
259
26.20
ID INFORMATION
SCREEN
Overview When the αi servo or αi spindle is connected, if each of the units (motor
or amplifier) actually connected it has ID information, the ID information
can be read and displayed on the CNC screen.
26.20.1
Servo Information
Screen
Displaying the servo ID
screen
: If no servo information is recorded, servo information is automatically

stored in flash ROM. On the screen, if there is a difference between the
servo information in flash ROM and the actual servo information, the
corresponding items are preceded by *, as shown below. This allows
you to determine whether the configuration of connected units is
changed. At this time, the servo information is read from flash ROM.
Editing the servo ID The servo information recorded or stored in flash ROM can also be edited.
screen See Chapter 6 “Digital Servo” in the Maintenance Manual (B–64115EN).
260
26.20.2
αi Spindle Information
Screen
Displaying the spindle ID
screen
: If no spindle information is recorded, spindle information is

automatically stored in flash ROM. On the screen, if there is a
difference between the spindle information in flash ROM and the
actual spindle information, the corresponding items are preceded by
*, as shown below. This allows you to determine whether the
configuration of connected units is changed. At this time, the spindle
information is read from flash ROM.
Editing the spindle ID The spindle information recorded or stored in flash ROM can also be
screen edited.
See Chapter 7 “AC Spindle” in the Maintenance Manual (B–64115EN).
261
26.21 If the speed–oriented and precision–oriented parameters are set with the
advanced preview control function or AI contour control function and
MACHINING then the precision level is set according to the machining conditions
CONDITION during machining, the parameters appropriate to the conditions can be
SELECTING automatically calculated to perform machining.
FUNCTION
NOTE
This function cannot be used for inch output machines.
1) Set the speed–oriented (precision level 1) and precision–oriented

(precision level 10) parameters on the machining parameter tuning
screen.
2) A precision level between the speed–oriented (precision level 1)
setting and the precision–oriented (precision level 10) setting entered
on the machining parameter tuning screen can be selected on the
precision level selection screen.
Since the direct proportionality is established between the two levels,
the optimal parameter setting can be selected by selecting a level
between them.
The precision level can be changed using the program as well as on
the precision level selection screen.
26.22 The PARAMETER SET SUPPORTING screen allows you to perform the
following operations, so you can easily start up or adjust the machine.
PARAMETER SET
D Displaying a minimum set of parameters together that must be set
SUPPORTING during startup of the machine
SCREEN D Displaying the servo tuning, spindle tuning, machining parameter
tuning screens
262
27. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION AND EDITING
27 PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING
263
AND EDITING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
27.1 The following part program storage and editing is possible

FOREGROUND D Program tape registration to the memory
S Single program registration
EDITING S Multi program tape registration
D Program input via MDI
D Program deletion
S Single program deletion
S All programs deletion
S Multi programs deletion by specification the range
D Program punching
S Single program punching
S All programs punching
S Multi programs punching by specification the range
D Program editing
- Change
S Word change
S Change of 1-word to multi-words
- Insertion
S Word insertion
S Multi words, and multi blocks insertion
- Deletion
S Word deletion
S Deletion to EOB
S Deletion to the specified word
D Part program collation
Collation of program stored in the memory and program on the tape
can be done.
D Sequence number automatic insertion
The sequence number, where a certain increment value is added to the
sequence number of the previous block can be automatically inserted
at the head of each block in preparation of programs by the part
program editing.
The initial value of sequence number and a certain increment amount
can be set.
27.2 Part program storage and editing can be done during machining. The
same functions as foreground editing can be performed.
BACKGROUND However, it is not possible to delete all programs at one time.
EDITING
264
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION AND EDITING
27.3 The following editing is possible.

EXTANDED PART D Conversion
PROGRAM EDITING - Address conversion
An address in the program can be converted to another address. For
example address X in the program can be converted to address Y.
- Word conversion
A word in the program can be converted to another word. For
example, a programmed M03 can be converted to M04.
D Program copy
A part or all of a program can be copied to make a new program.
D Program move
A part or all of a program can be moved to make a new program.
D Program merge
A new program can be created by merging two programs.
D Editing in the key–in buffer
A word starting from the current cursor position or words up to an EOB
can be copied and moved from the program to key–in buffer. In
addition, characters input in the key–in buffer can be edited.
27.4 Number of registered programs is 200.

NUMBER OF
REGISTERED
PROGRAMS
27.5 The part program storage length can be selected below :

640 m (for 0i Mate–TC and 0i Mate–MC)
PART PROGRAM 320 m/640 m (for 0i–TC and 0i–MC).
STORAGE LENGTH
27.6 Program can be prepared by storing machine position obtained by manual

operation in the memory as program position. Data other than the
PLAY BACK coordinate value (M codes, G codes, feed rates, etc.) are registered in the
memory by the same operation as part program storage and editing.
27.7 Part program registration and punch can be commanded externally.

EXTERNAL I/O D Program registration
A part program can be registered in memory through the connected
DEVICE CONTROL input device for background editing using the external read start
signal.
D Program punch
A part program can be punched through the connected output device
for background editing using the external punch start signal.
265
AND EDITING NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
27.8 The following two screens can be displayed with graphic data for
guidance in programming in the CNC format:
CONVERSATIONAL D G code list
PROGRAMMING D Standard format of a G-code block
WITH GRAPHIC Programs can be created by referring to guidelines and entering necessary
data interactively.
FUNCTION
O0010 N00000
G00 :
G01 :
G02 :
G03 :
G04 :
G10 :
G20 :
G21 :
G25 :
G26 :
G27 :
G28 :
EDIT **** *** *** 11:42:31

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
↓ When G01 is selected
PROGRAM O0010 N00000

G01 :
G01 G G G X (X,Z)
X U
Z W
C
F U
M
S
T
; W
Z
EDIT **** *** *** 11:56:41

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
27.9 The password function (parameter NE9) can be locked using parameter
PASSWD and parameter KEYWD to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999.
PASSWORD In the locked state, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this state,
FUNCTION program Nos. 9000 to 9999 cannot be modified unless the correct
keyword is set.
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs
from the value set in the parameter KEYWD. The values set in these
parameters are not displayed. The locked state is released when the value
already set in the parameter PASSWD is also set in parameter KEYWD.
When 0 is displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD is not
set.
266
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 28. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
28 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
267
28. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
28.1 The CNC checks the following itself.

SELF DIAGNOSIS D Abnormality of detection system
FUNCTIONS D Abnormality of position control unit
D Abnormality of servo system
D Overheat
D Abnormality of CPU
D Abnormality of ROM
D Abnormality of RAM
D Abnormality in data transfer between MDI
D Abnormality of part program storage memory
D Abnormality in tape reader read function
D Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
The CNC also checks other items.
Input/output signals from PMC to CNC, or vice versa, and inner status
of the CNC can be displayed.
28.2 Alarms specific to a machine tool can be added as alarms that can be
diagnosed on the failure diagnosis guidance screen.
MACHINE ALARM The following alarms can be added.
DIAGNOSIS
1. External alarm messages (alarm numbers 1000 to 19999)
2. Macro alarms (#3000) (alarm numbers 3000 to 3200)
268
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 29. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
29 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
The NC has the following input/output data.

These data are input/output via various input/output devices as
CRT/MDI, tape reader, etc.
D Input data
The NC has the following input data.
- Part program
- Tool compensation amount and Work zero point offset value
- Tool life management data
- Setting data
- Custom macro common variable
- Pitch error compensation data
- Parameters
D Output data
The NC has the following output data.
- Part program
- Tool compensation amount and work zero point offset value
- Setting data
- Custom macro common variable
- Parameters
269
29. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
29.1 The following can be input/output via the reader/punch interface.

READER/PUNCH D Part program registration/output
INTERFACES D Tool offset amount, work zero point offset amount, input/output
D Tool life management data input
D Custom macro common variable input/output
D Pitch error compensation data input/output
D Parameter punch input/output
Usually, the screen is switched according to the type of data to be input
from or output to an external device; for example, a parameter screen is
used for parameter input/output, and a program screen is used for program
input/output. However, a single ALL I/O screen can be used to input and
output programs, parameters, offset data, and macro variables.
29.2 The following Input/Output devices are prepared, which are connectable
to the reader/puncher interface.
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
29.2.1 When the Floppy Cassette is connected to the NC, machining programs
FANUC Floppy stored in the NC can be saved on a Floppy Cassette, and machining
programs saved in the Floppy Cassette can be transferred to the NC.
Cassette
29.2.2 The built-in hard disk enables data to be stored and it can be connected
FANUC Program File to the reader/puncher interface to input data to CNC. This hard disk has
a large storage capacity of approximately 50,000 m of paper tape data, so
Mate it can register maximum 1024 command programs.
It can be connected to the remote buffer to achieve high-speed transfer of
maximum 86.4 kbps.
The hard disk is sealed to be continuously used under the factory
environment.
29.2.3 The FANUC Handy File is a compact multi functional input/ouput floppy
FANUC Handy File disk unit for use with various types of FA equipment. Programs can be
transferred or edited through operations performed directly on the Handy
File or through remote operation from connected equipment.
Compared with media such as paper tape, a 3.5″ floppy disk is both
compact and durable, and eliminates noise during input/output.
Programs with a total capacity of up to 1.44 MB (equivalent to about 3600
m paper tape) can be saved on a single floppy disk.
270
29.3 By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
EXTERNAL When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
PROGRAM INPUT Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.
29.4 Files on a memory card can be referenced, and different types of data such
as part programs, parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input and output in text file format.
USING A MEMORY
CARD The major functions are listed below.
D Displaying a directory of stored files
The files stored on a memory card can be displayed on the directory
screen.
D Searching for a file
A search is made for a file on a memory card and, if found, it is
displayed on the directory screen.
D Reading a file
Text–format files can be read from a memory card.
D Writing a file
Data such as part programs can be stored to a memory card in text file
format.
D Deleting a file
A file can be selected and deleted from a memory card.
CNC
Writing a file
Reading a file
Displaying a Memory card
directory
Searching for
a file
Deleting a file
271
29.5 To perform DNC operation, load a machining program created on a PC

onto a memory card and then inserting the memory card into the PCMCIA
DNC OPERATION port on the front of the monitor.
WITH MEMORY During DNC operation, secure the memory card with the fixing bracket.
CARD
Fixing bracket
Memory card
PC
CNC
Creation of a machining program DNC operation
29.6 The FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol enabling data

transmission between the FANUC CNC unit and a personal computer by
DNC2 CONTROL connecting them via the RS–232C interface.
The FANUC DNC2 has the following features:

(1) This protocol is based on the communication protocol LSV2 used by
some CNC manufacturers in Europe, so that software can easily be
established even with a personal computer.
The RS–232C interface is used to connect a personal computer with
the FANUC CNC. The RS–422 interface can also be used to improve
the transmission rate.
(2) This protocol is used for one–to–one (point–to–point) communication
between one FANUC CNC unit and one personal computer.
The protocol cannot provide multi–point communication between one
personal computer and more than one CNC unit.
Command / Response
Personal
CNC
Computer Response / Command
272
29.7 When an option board (the Ethernet board or board with data server) is
used, the following Ethernet functions are available:
ETHERNET
FUNCTION When the Ethernet board is used
(OPTION BOARD) – FOCAS1/Ethernet function
When the board with data server board is used

– FOCAS1/Ethernet function
– Data server function
These functions can be used together at the same time.
Personal
computer
Operation from
personal computer
Hub
ATA flash card
Operation from NC
273
29.7.1 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows remote control and monitoring of

FOCAS1/Ethernet CNCs from the personal computer.
For details, refer to “FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER
Function Operator’s Manual (B–63644EN)” and “FANUC Open CNC
FOCAS1/Ethernet CNC/PMC Data Window Library Description.”
NC data transfer The following NC data can be transferred by operation on the personal
computer:
D Data related to controlled axes and spindles
- Absolute position, relative position, machine position
- Remaining travel distance
- Actual feedrate
D NC program
D Directory information in part program storage
D NC file data
- Parameters
- Tool offset values
- Custom macro variables
- Workpiece zero point offset values
- Settings
- P code macro variables
D Tool life management data
D History data
- Operation history data
- Alarm history data
D Data related to servo systems and spindles
D Data related to profile diagnosis
D Modal data
D Diagnostic data
D A/D conversion data
D Alarm information
D NC system identification information
D PMC data
- Addresses G, F, Y, X, A, R, T, K, C, D
Remote control The following operations can be performed by operation on the personal
computer:
D Selecting NC programs
D Deleting NC programs
D External reset
Operation The following operation can be performed by operation on the personal

computer:
D DNC operation
274
29.7.2 The data server function can perform NC data transfer and DNC operation
Data Server Function by using FTP.
The data server function operates mainly as an FTP client. It also operates
as an FTP server.
The data server function uses the ATA flash card included in (attached to)
the data server board as an NC data storage area. For details, refer to
“FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER Board Operator’s Manual
(B–63644EN).”
NC data transfer By operation on an NC, this function is operated as an FTP client and
(between the personal provides the following services:
computer and the ATA D GET
card on the data server D MGET
board] <FTP client> D PUT
D MPUT
D DIR
D DEL
NC data transfer By operation on the personal computer, the function is operated as an FTP
[between the personal server and provides the following services:
computer and the ATA D GET
card on the data server D MGET
board] <FTP server> D PUT
D MPUT
D DIR
D DEL
NC data transfer The following NC data can be transferred by operation on an NC:

[between the hard disk D NC programs
on the data server board D NC file data
and part program - Parameters
storage]
- Tool offset values
- Custom macro variables
- Workpiece origin offset values
- M code group
D History data
- Operation history data
275
Operation [between the The following operations can be performed by operation on an NC:
hard disk on the data D DNC operation
server board and part D DNC operation by subprogram call (M198)
program storage]
Operation [between the The following operations can be performed by operation on an NC:
personal computer and D DNC operation
part program storage] D DNC operation by subprogram call (M198)
ATA flash card ATA flash card management can be performed by operation on an NC.
management D ATA flash card formatting
D ATA flash card check
D Display of a list of files on the ATA flash card
276
29.8 When the power mate CNC series is used as an additional axis (slave) of
the CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed
POWER MATE CNC and set by the CNC.
MANAGER The power mate CNC manager enables the following display and setting:
(1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
(2) Parameter display and setting
(3) Diagnosis display
(4) System configuration screen display
(5) Alarm display
The power mate CNC series that can be used as the slave is a β amplifier
with I/O Link.
POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345

1.GROUP0 / β O12345678 N12345 2.GROUP1 / β
SYSTEM ****## SYSTEM 88A101
3.GROUP2 / β 4.GROUP3 / β
SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM ****##

SERVO ****##
PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT)
The figure above shows a sample four–slave display screen on a display

unit with twelve soft keys. A unit with seven soft keys can also display
the four–slave display screen.
277
29.9 The field networks listed below are supported to transfer DI/DO signals
assigned to PMC addresses to other CNCs or other vendors’ devices that
FIELD NETWORKS conform to the same communication standards.
PROFIBUS–DP PROFIBUS–DP is a communication function defined by the PROFIBUS

Association.
PROFIBUS–DP contains master and slave functions. The CNC can
support both functions simultaneously.
For details, refer to “FANUC Profibus–DP Board Operator’s Manual
(B–62924EN).”
DeviceNet DeviceNet is a communication function defined by Open DeviceNet

Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA). DeviceNet contains master and slave
functions. The CNC can support both functions at the same time.
For details, refer to “FANUC DeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual
(B–63404EN).”
278
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 30. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
30 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
279
30. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
30.1 With the emergency stop, all commands stops, and the machine stops
immediately. Connect the “emergency stop” signal both to the control
EMERGENCY STOP unit and to the servo unit side.
When emergency stop is commanded, servo excitation is also reset, and
servo ready signal will also turn off. Move distance of the machine will
still be reflected in the actual position and machine position will not be
lost (Follow up function). After resetting the emergency stop, operation
can thus be continued without need of another reference point return.
To design a safe machine tool, use an emergency stop signal for it
properly.
The emergency stop signal is intended to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC control unit, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. Generally, the B contact of a pushbutton switch is used
to input the emergency stop signal.
Closing the contact used for the emergency stop signal (*ESP) releases
the CNC unit from an emergency stop state, thus enabling it to control and
operate the servo motor and spindle motor.
Opening the contact used for the emergency stop signal (*ESP) resets the
CNC unit and brings it to an emergency stop. Opening the contact also
decelerates the servo motor and spindle motor to a stop.
Switching off the electric power of the servo amplifier for a servo motor
applies a dynamic brake to the servo motor. If the servo motor is used for
a horizontal axis, however, a load on the horizontal axis may drop to cause
the servo motor to rotate. To avoid this unintended motion, use a servo
motor with a brake or use another appropriate provision.
Switching off the electric power of the servo amplifier for a spindle motor
suddenly allows the spindle motor to keep rotating from force of habit,
which can be dangerous.
Avoiding this danger requires a control function that detects when the
emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact becomes open, and makes sure that
the spindle motor decelerates to a stop, then switches off the electric
power.
The FANUC servo amplifier αi series is designed with considerations on
the behavior mentioned above. Just supply an emergency stop signal to
the power supply module (hereafter called PSM) of the servo amplifier
αi series. The PSM outputs an electric power MCC control signal. This
signal can be used to switch on and off the electric power supplied to the
power supply module.
Basically, this CNC control unit is designed to use a software limit
function to detect overtravel, so an ordinary overtravel detection limit
switch is unnecessary. However, a stroke end limit switch must be
provided and connected to an emergency stop signal so that the
emergency stop signal can cause the machine to stop if the machine goes
over the software limit because of a servo feedback system failure.
The following diagram shows an example of connecting an emergency
stop signal when the CNC control unit and αi series servo amplifier are
used.
280
Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Power
supply for
relays
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
EMG
Relay
I/O unit connected to the CNC
emg1 (module)
+24
*ESP
α series control amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External
power supply
L1 L2 L3
Spark killer
SK
3φ
Coil
AC200V
L1
L2
L3
Circuit MCC AC reactor

breaker 1
CAUTION
When connecting the CNC unit to a spindle motor and
amplifier from a manufacturer other than FANUC, you
should develop a sequence that, if the emergency stop
signal contact becomes open when the spindle motor is
running, decelerates the spindle motor to a stop safely,
according to the respective manuals.
281
30.2
OVERTRAVEL
FUNCTIONS
30.2.1 When the movable section has gone beyond the stroke end, a signal is
Overtravel output, the axis decelerates to a stop, and overtravel alarm is displayed.
All directions on all axes has overtravel signals.
30.2.2 The movable section of the machine is parameter set in machine

Stored Stroke Check 1 coordinates value. If the machine moves beyond the preset range, it
decelerates to a stop and alarm is displayed. (This function is valid after
manual reference point return at power on.)
This function can be used instead of hardware overtravel limit switch.
When both is equipped with, both are valid.
Unlike overtravel detection, stored stroke check 1 checks whether the
distance between the current position and that at which the tool will be
stopped after deceleration exceeds the limit.
D For manual operation, parameter setting can be made to stop tool
movement along an axis when the tool is on a boundary with the
inhibition area and generate an alarm.
D For manual operation, parameter setting can be made to output just a
stroke limit arrival signal without generating any alarm when the tool
enters the inhibition area. (Movement along an axis is stopped.)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X1, Y1, Z1, ...)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
The shaded part is
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
the inhibition area.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X2, Y2, Z2, ...)
D Automatic alarm release After an OT alarm is generated, moving the tool along the axis to the
movable range can release the OT alarm without reset operation. Whether
to enable automatic release is specified by parameter setting.
282
30.2.3 M series An inhibition area can be specified inside or outside an area set by
Stored Stroke Check 2 parameter or by program. Command distance from the machine
coordinates zero point for limit positions. This function is valid after
(G22, G23) (M series) manual reference point return right after the power on. When specifying
the limits with program, limits or axes X, Y, Z can be set.
The inhibition area can be changed according to the workpiece. The
parameter decides whether the inhibition area is outside or inside the
specified area.
D Parameter setting can be made to generate an alarm before the
inhibition area is entered.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)
Inhibition area outside

(I, J, K)
Inhibition area inside
Format
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
On/off of stored stroke check 2 is commanded by program as follows:
G22 : Stored stroke check function on
G23 : Stored stroke check function off
283
30.2.4 T series
Stored Stroke Checks
2 and 3 (G22, G23)
(T series)
Stored stroke check 2 The designation of the forbidden area can be specified by parameters or
(G22, G23) program.
The forbidden area can be changed for each workpiece. Selection
between inside or outside as the forbidden area is made by parameters.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, K)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, K)
Inhibition area outside Inhibition area inside
Stored stroke check 3 Inside the area specified by parameters is the forbidden area.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X1, Z1,....)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
This shaded area is the forbidden
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
area.
(X2, Z2,....)
Format
G22 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
On/off of stored stroke check 2 is commanded by program as follows:
G22 : Stored stroke check function on
G23 : Stored stroke check function off
284
30.2.5 This function calculates the movement end point at the start of movement
Stroke Limit Check in a block, during automatic operation, based on the current machine
position and the specified amount of travel, to check whether the end point
Before Move falls within the inhibited area for stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3. If the end
point falls within an inhibited area, movement for that block is stopped
immediately upon the start of movement and an alarm is issued.
NOTE
This function checks only whether the end point falls within
an inhibited area. It does not check whether the tool passes
through an inhibited area between the start and end points.
However, an alarm is issued upon a tool’s entering an
inhibited area according to stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3.
Example 1)
Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 1

or 2
End point
Start point
Stops at point a according to stored
stroke limit 1 or 2.

or 2
End
point
Start point→ Stops immediately upon the start of

movement due to stroke limit check
being performed before movement.
285
Example 2)
Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 2 End

or 3 point
Start point Stops at point a according to stored

stroke limit 2 or 3.

or 3
End
point
Start point→ Stops immediately upon the start of movement due to stroke
limit check being performed before movement.
30.2.6 When a new tool is mounted, position the tip of the tool on the two corners
of the limit area, and specify the machine coordinates of the corners in the
Stroke Limit Externally
parameters for stroke limit 1. The machine coordinates are stored in the
Setting CNC as the limit positions. Then input signals for setting the stroke limit.
Stroke limit setting signals are provided for each axis and each direction.
Checking of the stroke limit can also be selected by turning on or off the
limit release signal common to all axes.
286
30.2.7 T series It is used for checking the interference between the chuck and tail stocks
Chuck and Tail Stock and preventing the damage of machines.
Set the area of entry prohibition from the exclusive setting screen
Barrier (T series) according to the shapes of chuck and tail stocks.
When a tool enters the area of entry prohibition during cutting, the
travelling of tool is stopped and an alarm message is displayed. The tool
can be escaped from the prohibition area by moving in the opposite
direction to that on entry. The Yes/No of this function is selected by the
G22 (Stored stroke limit on). G23 (Stored stroke limit off), and signal of
machine side.
Tail stock barrier select
G code Chuck barrier Tail stock barrier
signal
G22 0 Yes Yes
G22 1 Yes No
G23 Irrelevant No No
The shape of chuck or tail stock is defined on the setting screen.
Explanations
D Dimension definition of
chuck
Outer diameter Inner diameter
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
L
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
L
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ W
L1
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
W
W1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ
L1
W1 X X
CZ CZ
Z Z
CX CX
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ: Workpiece coordinate system origin
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Symbol Description
L Length of chucking claw
W Size of chucking (radius input)
L1 Holding length of chucking claw
W1 Holding difference of chucking claw (radius input)
CX Position of chuck (X axis)
CZ Position of chuck (Z axis)
287
D Dimension definition of
tail stock
X
L
L1
TZ
L2
D3 D2 D1 D Z
: Workpiece coordinate system origin
Symbol Description
L Length of tail stock
D Diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)
L1 Length of tail stock (1)
D1 Diameter of tail stock (1) (Diameter input)
L2 Length of tail stock (2)
D2 Diameter of tail stock (2) (Diameter input)
D3 Hole diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)
TZ Position of tail stock (Z axis)
NOTE
This function cannot be used together with stored stroke
check 2 or 3.
288
30.3
INTERLOCK
30.3.1 Axis feed specified to each axis can be stopped separately. If interlock is
specified to any of the moving axis during cutting feed, all axes of the
Interlock for Each Axis
machine movement will decelerate to a stop. When interlock signal is
reset, the moving starts.
30.3.2 Feed of all axes can be inhibited. When all axes interlock is commanded
All Axes Interlock during move, it decelerates and stops. When all axes interlock signal is
reset, the moving restarts.
30.3.3 Feeding of a specific axis in a specific direction can be inhibited

independently of other axes. If the interlock signal is input to any of the
Interlock for Each Axis
axes during a cutting feed operation, all axes decelerate and come to a
Direction stop. When the interlock signal for each axis direction is released, the axes
start moving again.
This function is usable for both the manual and automatic operations of
the M series. For the T series, the DAU parameter (bit 4 of parameter No.
3003) can be used to specify whether to make the function usable only for
the manual operation or for both the manual and automatic operations.
NOTE
To enable axis direction–specific interlocking for the
automatic operation of the T series, set the DAU parameter
(bit 4 of parameter No. 3003).
30.3.4 T series Feeding of all axes can be inhibited only during automatic operation.
Start Lock When the start lock signal is input while the axes are moving, all axes
decelerate and come to a stop. When the start lock signal is released, the
axes start moving again.
30.3.5 During automatic operation, the start of the next block can be disabled.
A block that has already started is executed as is till its end.
Block Start Interlock
When the block start interlock is released, the execution of the next block
starts.
30.3.6 During automatic operation, the start of a block containing a move

Cutting Block Start command other than positioning can be disabled.
When the cutting block start interlock is released, the execution of the
Interlock next block starts.
When spindle rotation is specified or when the spindle speed is changed,
the cutting block start interlock can be applied until the spindle reaches
a target speed so that the next cutting block can be executed at the target
spindle speed.
289
30.4 Feed rate can be decelerated by an external deceleration signal from the
machine side. A feed rate after deceleration can be set by parameter.
EXTERNAL External deceleration is prepared every axis and every direction.
DECELERATION When the tool is to be moved in the reverse direction, futile time may not
be wasted since no external deceleration is applied.
By setting the corresponding parameter, whether to make this signal
effective only for rapid traverse mode or for all feed modes can be
specified for each axis and for each direction.
This function allows the maximum of valid strokes and keeps shock to the
machine to a minimum, to stops at stroke end.
30.5 When a cutting tool collides with the machine body or is damaged during
cutting, the load torque applied to the motors is larger than during normal
UNEXPECTED feeding or cutting. The abnormal load detection function calculates the
DISTURBANCE load torque and transfers the value from the CNC to the PMC. If the load
TORQUE DETECTION torque is larger than the value set in a parameter, the function stop the
motor or reverses the motor rotation to retract the tool by the distance set
in a parameter. In this way, damage to the machine is prevented. (The
motor rotation reverse function is available only for the servo motor axes.)
Unexpected disturbance torque detection can be disabled only for a
specific axis.
290
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 31. STATUS OUTPUT
31 STATUS OUTPUT
291
31. STATUS OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
31.1 This signal is sent to the PMC when NC power is on and control becomes
possible. Sending of this signal will be stopped when NC power is turned
NC READY SIGNAL off.
31.2 This signal is sent to the PMC when the servo system becomes operatable.
Axes necessary to be braked must be braked when this signal is not sent.
SERVO READY
SIGNAL
31.3 This signal shows that tape reader or main program in memory is
rewinding.
REWINDING SIGNAL
31.4 This signal is transmitted when the NC comes under an alarm status.
ALARM SIGNAL
31.5 This signal is sent out when pulse distribution of the M, S, T, or B

functions has ended, so that they can be used after move of the
DISTRIBUTION END commanded block ends.
SIGNAL
31.6 This signal is sent out when it is under automatic operation.

AUTOMATIC
OPERATION SIGNAL
31.7 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is being activated.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION START
SIGNAL
31.8 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is held by feed hold.
FEED HOLD SIGNAL
31.9 This signal is sent out to show that the NC has been reset.
RESET SIGNAL
31.10 This signal shows that an axis is under in–position status. This signal is
output for all axes.
IN–POSITION SIGNAL
31.11 This signal shows that an axis is moving. This signal is sent out for every
axis.
MOVE SIGNAL This move signal can be combined with the interlock signal to
automatically clamp and unclamp the machine, or control on/off of the
lubricating oil.
292
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 31. STATUS OUTPUT
31.12 This signal is output to show move direction of each axis. This signal is
output for each axis.
AXIS MOVE
DIRECTION SIGNAL
31.13 This signal shows that the move command is done under rapid traverse.
RAPID TRAVERSING
SIGNAL
31.14 This signal is output to show that the machine is under tapping mode (G63
for M series) or tapping cycle (G74, G84 for M series), (G84, G88 for T
TAPPING SIGNAL series) is under operation.
31.15 This signal shows that the machine is under thread cutting mode (G33)
or thread cutting cycle (T series).
THREAD CUTTING
SIGNAL
31.16 This signal shows that the machine is under constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
CONSTANT SURFACE
SPEED CONTROL
SIGNAL
31.17 This signal shows that input is done under inch input mode (G20).
INCH INPUT SIGNAL
31.18 To inform the exterior of the states of software operator’s panel, which are
set via CRT/MDI, and machine operator’s panel, following DI state
DI STATUS OUTPUT output signals are sent.
SIGNAL D Mode-select check signal
D Single-block check signal
D Manual absolute on/off check signal
D Dry-run check signal
D Machine-lock check signal
D Auxiliary-function-lock check signal
D Optional block-skip check signal
D Mirror-image check signal
31.19 The position switch function outputs a signal to a specified

controlled-axis when the machine coordinates of the controlled-axis are
POSITION SWITCH within the range specified by the corresponding parameter.
FUNCTION The parameter specifies an arbitrary controlled-axis and the operating
range (machine coordinates) within which the position switch signal is
output.
Up to sixteen position switch signals can be output.
293
32. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
32 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT
The external data input is as follows.

D External tool compensation
D External program number search
D External workpiece coordinate system shift
D External machine zero point shift
D External alarm message
D External operator message
D Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required
parts
294
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 32. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT
32.1 The tool compensation value for the offset number specified in the
program can be externally modified.
EXTERNAL TOOL The input signal designates whether the input tool offset amount is:
COMPENSATION D Absolute or incremental
D Geometry offset or tool wear offset
D Cutter radius compensation amount or tool length compensation
amount
It the machine is equipped with automatic measurement devices of tools
and workpiece, error can be input to the NC with this function.
External tool compensation amount range is:
0 to ±7999
in least command increment.
32.2 A program number from 1 - 9999 can be given from outside to the NC to
call the corresponding program from the NC memory.
EXTERNAL In machines with automatic loading function of various workpiece, this
PROGRAM NUMBER function can be used to automatically select and execute program suitable
SEARCH to the workpiece.
With bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300, the external program number
search function can also be cancelled by a CNC reset operation.
32.3 The work coordinate system can be shifted for the shift amount given
from outside.
EXTERNAL The shift amount specified by an input signal is set as an external offset
WORKPIECE value for workpiece zero points by which the workpiece coordinate
COORDINATE system shifts. The shift amount is an absolute value, not an incremental
value.
SYSTEM SHIFT
The shift amount range is :
0 to ±7999
in least command increment.
32.4 The machine coordinate system is compensated by shift amount given

from outside. This shift amount always take absolute value; never an
EXTERNAL MACHINE increment value.
ZERO POINT SHIFT The shift amount range is:
0 to ±9999
in detection unit.
When shift amount is input, the actual machine move distance is the
difference between the previous offset amount and current offset amount.
This function is used t compensate the machine coordinate system error
caused by mechanical deformation.
32.5 By sending alarm number from outside, the NC is brought to an alarm

status; an alarm message is sent to the NC, and the message is displayed
EXTERNAL ALARM on the screen of the NC. Reset of alarm status is also done with external
MESSAGE data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a single time. Alarms
0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the
CNC displays them by adding 1000 to each alarm number. The messages
of up to 32 characters can be sent together with an alarm.
295
32. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
32.6 Message to the operator is given from outside the NC, and the message
is displayed.
EXTERNAL The message is sent after a message number 0 to 999. Either a message
OPERATOR’S consisting of up to 255 characters or up to four messages each consisting
MESSAGE of up to 63 characters can be displayed at the same time by parameter
setting.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by
adding 2000 to each alarm number. When a message from 100 to 999 is
displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed.
An external data will clear the operator messages.
32.7 The number of required parts and the number of machined parts can be
preset externally. Values from 0 to 9999 can be preset.
SUBSTITUTION OF
THE NUMBER OF
REQUIRED PARTS
AND NUMBER OF
MACHINED PARTS
296
33. KEY INPUT FROM PMC
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT)
33 KEY INPUT FROM PMC (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT)
When the PMC inputs the code signal corresponding to a key on the MDI
panel to the CNC, the code signal can be input in the same way as with
actual operation of the key on the MDI panel. For example, this function
is usable in the following case:
After allowing to travel the tool at an arbitrary machining position by
using the playback function (option), when to store its positions as the
program command, X, Y, Z, <INSERT>, etc. must be input via key
operations. However, these operations can be realized simply by
depressing a switch on the operator’s panel at the machine side.
When the switch is pressed, the PMC inputs code signals corresponding
to keys X, Y, Z, and <INSERT> to the CNC. This produces the same
results as with actual key operations.
297
34. FUNCTIONS FOR PUNCH PRESS NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
34 FUNCTIONS FOR PUNCH PRESS
298
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION 34. FUNCTIONS FOR PUNCH PRESS
34.1 The following G codes are provided for Series 0i–PC. The G codes are
classified into two: A and B. One of the G code types can be selected using
PREPARATORY a parameter. In this manual, G code system A is assumed.
FUNCTIONS
G code list (1/2)
System A System B Group Meaning
G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation (CW)
G03 G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation (CCW)
G04 G04 Dwell
G08 G08 Advanced preview control
G09 G09 00 Exact stop
G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 Cancel programmable data input mode
G17 G17 XpYp plane where Xp: X–axis or an axis parallel to it
Yp: Y–axis or an axis paral-
G18 G18 02 ZpXp plane lel to it
Zp: Z–axis or an axis paral-
G19 G19 YpZp plane lel to it
G20 G20 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 Input in mm
G22 G22 Stored stroke limit function on
04
G23 G23 Stored stroke limit function off
G26 G26 Bolt hole circle
G28 G50 Automatic reference point return
G32 G32 Automatic safety zone setting
00
G33 G33 Skip function
G38 G38 Bending compensation X
G39 G39 Bending compensation Y
G40 G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 G41 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 G42 Cutter compensation right
G40.1 G40.1
Normal direction control canceled
(G150) (G150)
G41.1 G41.1
19 Left–side normal direction control turned on
(G151) (G151)
G42.1 G42.1
Right–side normal direction control turned on
(G152) (G152)
G50 G34 Scaling off
11
G51 G35 Scaling on
G52 G93 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 Machine coordinate system selection
299
G code list (2/2)

System A System B Group Meaning
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinates system 1 selection
14
G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override
G64 G64 Continuous cutting mode
G65 G95 00 Custom macro simple call
G66 G96 Custom macro modal call
12
G67 G97 Custom macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 Circular nibbling
G69 G69 Linear nibbling
G70 G70 Positioning & press off
G72 G72 Standard point command
G73 G75 Multi-piece machining command X
G74 G76 00 Multi-piece machining command Y
G75 G27 Automatic repositioning
G76 G28 Line at angle
G77 G29 Arc
G78 G36 Grid I
G79 G37 Grid II
G84 G84 Coordinate system rotating on
16
G85 G85 Coordinate system rotating off
G86 G86 Share proof
G87 G87 Square
00
G88 G78 Radius
G89 G79 Cut at angle
G90 G90 Absolute command
03
G91 G91 Incremental command
G92 G92 Coordinate system setting
00
G98 G98 Coordinate system setting (Multi-piece machining)
300
34.2
PRESS FUNCTIONS
34.2.1 In blocks which perform positioning (G00) along the X- or Y-axis in rapid
One–cycle Press traverse mode, a press start signal is sent to the press after positioning is
completed, thus enabling punching. Note however that no press start
signal is output in the following cases:
(1) When MDI mode has been selected
(2) When a M-code has been issued
(3) In a block between an M-code to clamp the workpiece and an M-code
to unclamp the workpiece
NOTE
Before positioning is completed, a press start signal may be
output depending on parameter settings.
34.2.2 The term nibbling refers to repeated punching without bringing the press
Continuous Press to a halt. A continuous-press-in-process signal is output in nibbling
blocks.
(Nibbling)
Circular Nibbling (G68) (1) The following command specifies circular nibbling:
And Linear Nibbling G68 I r Jq KDq P d Q p ;
(G69)
d
∆θ r
θ
+X
r : Radius
q : Angle between the line from the origin to the punch start point
and the positive X-axis
D q : Angle between the line from the origin to the punch start point
and the line from the origin to the punch end point
d : Tool diameter
p : Nibbling pitch
301
(2) The following command specifies linear nibbling:

G69 I ȏ Jq P d Q p ;
d
ȏ
+X
ȏ : Length of the line

θ : Angle between the line and the positive X-axis
d : Tool diameter
p : Nibbling pitch
Nibbling Mode (M–code) Nibbling can be performed in a block between an M-code for nibbling
(M12) and an M-code for nibbling cancel (M13). These M-codes are
specified by parameters.
Linear nibbling can be done by commanding G01 in the nibbling mode,
while circular nibbling can be done by commanding G02 and G03 in the
nibbling mode.
The tool diameter cannot be offset by G01, G02, G03 commands.
Accordingly, these commands are used together with cutter compensation
commands (G40, G41, G42) when nibbling is done by offsetting a
continuous straight line or circular arc leftwards or rightwards by the tool
diameter.
(1) Straight line
G01X –––– Y –––– Q –––– ;
The end point is designated by address X, Y, while the pitch is
designated by address Q.
(2) Circular arc
G02 X___ Y___ I___J___
Q ;
G03 R___
The end point is designated by address X, Y, the radius of circular arc is

designated by address I, J, or R and also the pitch is designated by address
Q.
Q: Pitch
302
N200G00G90X x1 Y y1 ;
N210M12;
N220G41X x2 Y y2 T02D02 ;
N230G01X x 3 Y y 3 Q ;
N240X x4 Y y4 ;
N250G03X x 5 Y y 5 I J ;
N260G01X x6 Y y6 ;
N270X x7 Y y7 ;
N280M13;
N290G40G00X x8 Y y8 T03 ;
N240 N260
(x3, y3) (x4, y4) (x5, y5) (x6, y6)
N230 N270
N250
(x2’, y2’)
(x7’, y7’)
(x7, y7)
N220
N290
(x8, y8)
(x1, y1)
The G40, G41, and G42 codes function as follows.

G code Function
G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 Leftward offset for moving direction of tool
G42 Rightward offset for moving direction of tool
Assume that diameter (radius) of the tool selected by T02 is preset to

offset NO.02.
34.2.3 Pressing a button on the press machine can output a press-in-progress

Manual Press signal. It is possible to specify whether punching is to be performed on
one cycle only or to be continued while the button is pressed.
303
34.2.4 G70 specifies rapid traverse for positioning. A press start signal is not
Positioning and Press output after positioning is completed.
off (G70)
Format
G70IP -- ;
34.2.5 The following parameters can be used to adjust the press start signal
Setting for Press output timing so that punching is smooth.
Start Signal (1) Punching specification for forming mode
(2) Setting up an upper limit to the positioning offset for press start signal
output
(3) Timer setting (early PF) for outputting a press start signal before
positioning is completed
(4) Timer setting for executing the next block before press is completed
34.2.6 It is possible to inhibit the press start signal from being output.
Press Start Lock
34.2.7 It is possible to defer the output of the press start signal until the press is
Press Start Wait ready to respond.
34.2.8 Up to two nibbling pitches can be specified according to an external signal

Changeable Nibbling or an M-code in a parameter. This function can be used to select a
maximum traveling pitch for a machine in which the speeds of a flywheel
Mode 2 Steps can be switched or according to the thickness of raw material.
34.2.9 In a block in which press start signal output is specified (except for
External Motion nibbling), an external operation signal, rather than the press start signal,
can be output as required by an external signal. This function can be used
Function for tapping.
304
34.3 For rapid traverse, the rapid traverse feedrates, time constants, and servo
loop gains can be switched according to the positioning distance set up
SWITCHING RAPID by a parameter for each axis. Use of this function can improve positioning
TRAVERSE accuracy.
FEEDRATES, TIME X– and Y–axes : Rapid traverse feedrates, time constants, and/or
CONSTANTS, servo loop gains are switched according to the
positioning distance (up to 7 steps).
AND/OR SERVO
Servo loop gains for rapid traverse and cutting
LOOP GAINS feed are switched
ACCORDING TO THE T–axis : Rapid traverse time constant and servo loop gains
POSITIONING are switched according to the positioning angle
DISTANCE (up to 3 steps).
C–axis : Rapid traverse feedrates and time constants are
switched according to the positioning angle (up to
3 steps).
34.4 For automatic rapid traverse, positioning along the X– and Y–axes can be
performed exactly in the specified time regardless of the positioning
POSITIONING TIME distance. Use of this function for nibbling can smooth punching
CONSTANT regardless of what the nibbling pitch is, because positioning can be done
CONTROL exactly in the constant time. (2 steps)
305
34.5 It is possible to punch out at two or more positions according to a certain

form by the command of one block. Whenever it is positioned at each
PATTERN FUNCTION position in the rapid traverse rate, the press start signal is outputted.
CAUTION
M code and pattern function can not be specified in the
same block.
34.5.1
Bolt Hole Circle (G26)
Format
G26I r J θ K n ;
#2 #1
r
θ
#n
34.5.2
Line at Angle (G76)
Format
G76I d J θ K n ;
#n
d
#2
#1
θ
306
34.5.3
Arc (G77)
Format
G77I r J θ P ∆θ K n ;
#n
#3
r #2
∆θ
#1
θ
34.5.4
Grid (G78, G79)
Format
G78I dx P nx J dy K ny ;
G79I dx P nx J dy K ny ;
G78 specifies punching from X–axis direction.
G79 specifies punching from X–axis direction.
#ny
#2y
dy
#1y
#1x #2x dx #nx
307
34.5.5
Share Proof (G86)
Format
G86I ȏ J θ P W1 Q W2 ;
W1 ȏ
θ
W2
34.5.6
Square (G87)
Format
G87I ȏ x J ȏ y P W1 Q W2 ;
W1
W2 + +
ȏy
+ +
ȏx
308
34.5.7
Radius (G88)
Format
G88I ȏ x J θ K ∆ θ P d Q p ;
r
∆θ
θ
34.5.8
Cut at Angle (G89)
Format
G89I ȏ J θ P d Q p ;
p
ȏ
θ
309
34.6
PATTERN BASE
Program 1
POINT COMMAND G90X100Y100 ;
G70X200Y200 ;
(G72) G26I50JOK4 ;
Program 2
G90X100Y100 ;
G72X200Y200 ;
G26I50J0K4 ;
Tool movement by program 1

Tool movement by program 2
G72X– Y– ;
An under–mentioned coordinates values can be instructed by an
above–mentioned command.
(1) Center point of Bolt hole circle (G26), Arc (G77), Circular nibblint
(G68), Radius (G88)
(2) Starting point of the line at angle (G76), grid (G78, G79), linear
nibbling (G69), cut at angle (G89), share proof (G86), and square
(G87)
G72 only designates the pattern base point; it does not move a tool.
CAUTION
M code, T code, and S code can not be specified in the same
block as G72.
310
34.7
MEMORY AND CALL
D
BY A/B MACRO D
D
G72X100.Y100. ;
A2G26I50.J0K4 ;² Designated for storage after execution
G72X200.Y100. ;
B2 ; ² Recall of pattern A2
G72X250.Y200. ;
B2 ;
G72X150.Y200. ;
B2 ;
D
D
D
(150, 200) (250, 200)
(100, 100) (200, 100)
When it is desired to repeatedly use a pattern with the same figure among
the pattern functions, it is possible to store the pattern with a number and
access it whenever necessary.
(1) Storage A1 – A5
A pattern function is executed and stored when address A (1 to 5) is
specified before a G code of pattern function.
A2G26I50.J04K; G26I50.J04K is stored in storage A2 of the
patternfunciton.
(2) Call B1 – B5
The pattern function memorized in address A can be called by address
B (1 to 5) command.
B2; – G26I50.J0K4 is called and executed.
Blocks (up to 192 characters per block) can be stored and called except
for the pattern function.
311
34.8
AUTOMATIC Y
REPOSITIONING
(G75) X
Workpiece clamp
Workpiece holder
G75X– ;
A series of the following commands can be given, using G75X_ ;
command.
(1) M10 ; : Workpiece clamp
(2) G70G91YyR ; : Escape of Y axis
(3) G70G91X–X ; : Shift of X axis
(4) G70G91Y–yR ; : Return of Y aixs
(5) M11 ; : Workpiece unclamp
yR, M10, and M11 can be set by parameters. The shift amount of the X
and Y axis in G75 is not added to the absolute coordinate value.
312
34.9
U/V/W MACRO
FUNCTION Program
:
:
Uxx to Vxx Storage and execution of

multiple blocks
:
:
Wxx Call and execution of

stored multiple blocks
:
:
:
:
The macro function can register a plurality of blocks as one macro and call
them whenever necessary.
34.9.1 When 2–digit figures 01 to 89 following address word U are added prior
to the instructions of plural blocks to be stored and the same figure is used
Storage of Macro
for the last figure following address word W, plural blocks instructed for
(U, V Command) that period are stored in memory.
The 2–digit figure following address U or V is called the macro number.
When macro number is 01 – 59, the blocks between U and V are
memorized accompanying the execution of the command.
On the contrary, when the Macro No. is 60 to 89, the command is not
executed and only the storage operation is performed. It is possible to
normally give instructions to all blocks inserted between U and V except
instructions for Macro storage by other Macro Nos.
34.9.2 It is possible to call a plurality of blocks stored previously as Macro by

giving instructions with a 2–digit numeral following address W.
Macro Call
(W Command)
313
34.9.3 Up to triple accessing is possible: another macro is called from a given

Multiple Call of Macro macro, which was called from still another macro.
34.9.4 The number of characters which can be stored for each macro having a
Storage Capacity of macro number between 01 to 89 can be specified with a parameter (up to
2700 characters).
Macro
34.9.5 Plural macros can be stored as one macro by using the macro number
Storage and Call of 90–99 and can call it.
The number of macros which can be stored on each of the macro number
Plural Macro (Macro 90–99 is up to 15 or less.
No.90 to 99)
314
34.10
MULTI–PIECE
MACHINING
X
Cutting margin

Material
plate

ȏy
Cutting
margin B
ȏx
Fig. 34.10
It is a function for the multi–piece machining by which several identical

product boards can be produced from one blank board with an easy
command.
A simple setting method allows so–called trial punching by the command
of the multi–piece machining function, thus facilitating a machining
command tape check prior to the whole machining.
315
34.10.1 Specify a command prior to the punching command for a single plate.
Base Point Command
of Multi–piece
Machining
Format
G98X xb Y yb I lx J ly P nx K ny ;
xb : X axis coordinates values in the multi–piece machining

base point (B of Fig. 13.10)
yb : Y axis coordinates values in the multi–piece machining
base point (B of Fig. 13.10)
lx : X axis direction length (Give by the positive number) of
one product
ly : Y axis direction length (Give by the positive number) of
one product
nx : The number of products in the X axis direction (Caution)
ny : The number of products in the Y aixs direction
(Caution)
CAUTION
Product board (in Fig. 34.10) is not included in the
number.
After a G98 command, specify the punching command for a single plate
at the lower left ( in Fig. 34.10) which performs the multi–piece
machining function operation at grid intervals, using a macro function
(storing a machining command between U and V commands).
D Command method :
G92X_Y_ ;
G98X_Y_I_J_P_K_ ;
Punching command for a single plate at the lower left
316
34.10.2 When machining commands stored by a macro function are to be called

Multi–piecemachining to perform the multi–piece machining function, use the following
commands.
Command
Format
G73W wn Q q ;
G74W wn Q q ;
G73 :When punching from X axis direction.
G74 :When punching from Y axis direction.
wn :Macro number
q :Machining start area specification
q=1 Start from the lower left of the sheet ( in the fig.).
q=2 Start from the lower right of the sheet (
in the fig.).
q=3 Start from the upper left of the sheet ( in the fig.).
q=4 Start from the upper right of the sheet ( in the fig.).
D Command method :
G92X_Y_ ;
G98X_Y_I_J_P_K_ ;
Punching command for a single plate at the lower left

Stored in Ux–Vx
G73WxQ1 ; Execution of multi–piece machining command

M30 ;
34.10.3 The processing mehtod can be selected by the parameter setting from the
Setting of Processing external signal MDI when the processing command tape of the
multi–piece machining is used for machining.
Method of Multi–piece
Machining Setting 0 : Command tape for the multi–piece machining is not used.
1 : Trial punching of the multi–piece machining
2 : Remainder punching after the trial punching of the multi–piece
machining
3 : All blank punching of multi–piece machining
317
34.10.4 By specifying a restart point by a P–code in a block containing G73/G74

Command to Restart (commands for punching multiple products), it is possible to restart
punching multiple products at the specified restart point.
Punching Multiple
Products
D Command format G73 (G74) W w Q q P p ;
w : Macro number
q : Machining start area specification
p : Restart point
The P-code specifies a restart point with a machining
sequence specified by G73/G74 or a Q-code.
Command range : 1xpxtotal number of workpieces
Q3 ³ ² Q4
H G F E
A B C D
Q1 ³ ² Q2
Examples G98X_Y_I_J_P3K1 ;
U90 ;
:
V90 ;
G73W90Q_P5 ;
The above program performs machining as follows:

(1) Partial machining
(a) Q1 command : Sequence of E→F→G→H
(b) Q2 command : Sequence of H→G→F→E
(c) Q3 command : Sequence of D→C→B
(d) Q4 command : Sequence of B→C→D
(2) Total machining
(a) Q1 command : Sequence of E→F→G→H
(b) Q2 command : Sequence of H→G→F→E
(c) Q3 command : Sequence of D→C→B→A
(d) Q4 command : Sequence of A→B→C→D
318
34.11 The hole position gap accompanied bending is compensated and the
drilling is performed.
BENDING
COMPENSATION
(G38, G39)
D Program format D Bending compensation for X axis direction
G38I X1 J X2 K X3 P X4 Q X5 R α ;
D Bending compensation for Y axis direction
G39I Y1 J Y2 K Y3 P Y4 Q Y5 R β ;
Area I Area II Area III Area Area V

X1 IV
X2
X3
X4
X5
α, β : These are called the benging coefficient.

The compensation amount attendant on a single bending
is specified.
X1 to X5 : The distance of X and Y axes direction from the standard
point is specified.
(Y1 to Y5) : Bending can be performed up to 4 times.
In a block after a bending command is sent, it is judged to which area
automatically designated the command value of the move command
belongs, thus allowing compensation in accordance with the bending
frequency.
When bending compensation cancel is required.
(1) Specify the cancel of bending compensation.
G38R0 : ... (Cancel of X axis direction)
G39R0 : ... (Cancel of Y axis direction)
(2) Specify M02, M30.
It is possible to cancel even in the reset state according to reset, clear,
and emergency stop.
319
34.12 This is the safety function to set the safety zone for protecting the
workpiece holder that holds the workpiece set on the carriage, and disable
SAFETY ZONE punching in that area or forbid the tool to approach thereinto.
CHECK
Table
#0 Tool figure area
#1 #2 #3 #4
Carriage Safety zone

#1 to #4
This function permits to set tool figure area (#0) and up to four safety
zones (#1 - #4), as shown above.
34.12.1 The safety zone is settable in two types, punch forbidden area and
Punch Forbidden Area approach forbidden area, that are selected by the parameter.
and Approach (1) Punch forbidden area
When the tool figure area goes into the safety zone and the punching
Forbidden Area
is commanded, an alarm is given to disable punching. In the case of
rapid traverse rate when the end point of positioning is in the forbidden
area, an alarm is given without moving the axis. (Previous check)
In the case of move command without punching, the tool figure area
can go into the punch forbidden area, but manual punching is
impossible after going into this area.
#0 Punching is impossible
in this area.
#1
Fig. 34.12.1 (a)
320
(2) Approach forbidden area

The tool figure area can not go into the safety zone. When the tool
figure area approaches into the safety zone by the move command, the
axis is immediately stopped and an alarm is given. This is valid in
either manual or automatic operation mode.
Axis stops, and alarm is given.
Move direction
#0
#2
Fig. 34.12.1 (b)
34.12.2 Set the machine coordinate value when the workpiece holder is positioned
Setting the Safety Zone at the tool center (punching position) by the parameters.
34.12.3 The detector on the machine automatically detects the positions of the
Automatic Setting of workpiece holders mounted on the carriage. Values representing the
detected positions are then set in the safety zone parameters.
the Safety Zone
Detector (secured to the machine)
#1 #2 #3 #4
Carriage
Fig. 34.12.3
The signal for detecting the position of the workpiece holders (#1 to #4)
turns on and off as workpiece holders #1 to #4 pass the detector as shown
in Fig. 34.12.3. The safety zone is determined from the signal. Auto
detection can be instructed through the use of G32 or an external signal.
321
34.13
TOOL FUNCTIONS
34.13.1 Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with an

T Code Output 8–digit numeral after address T. The 8–bit numeral is output to PMC in
a 32–bit binary code. This code is kept till the next T code is commanded.
Maximum input digits are set by parameters.
CAUTION
1 The T–code must be issued in positioning mode (G00).
2 A program must contain this T–code in a block in which
press is specified for the first time or any preceding block.
If a T–code is not issued, a press start signal will not be
output, and therefore the program will not advance to the
next block.
34.13.2 The CNC can control the turret axis (T–axis) for tool indexing as specified
T–axis Control by a parameter. This function selects a tool by issuing a T–code and
positioning the turret at a tool position specified on the tool registration
menu, where up to 136 tools can be registered. The T–code for T–axis
control consists of one to four digits.
Use of this function can reduce the tool replacement time largely, because
it supersedes tool replacement on the machine side by using T–axis
positioning.
34.13.3 T–codes can be ignored. An external signal is used to determine whether

to ignore the T–code. Once it is specified to ignore T–codes, the program
Ignoring T–code
operates exactly as if it contained no T–code. This function can be used,
for example, to check the program by marking on a workpiece with a
marking tool.
322
34.13.4 Tool position compensation along the X– and Y–axes can be effected for
Tool Offset tools specified by a code consisting of character T and one to four digits
that follow it. The amount of compensation is specified in the least
Compensation command increment defined on the tool registration menu during
installation. (Up to 136 tools, values: Positive or negative number
consisting of eight digits)
CAUTION
If an inch/metric switch–over option is specified, and the
measurement unit used in the machine is different from that
used in the input system, a maximum possible error is the
sum of half the least input increment and half the least
command increment. This error will not be accumulated.
34.13.5 Set the maximum number of punches for each tool, on the tool registration
screen. When the number of executed punches for the selected tool
Tool Life Management
exceeds the maximum number of punches for that tool, the tool life
reached signal PTLCH is output. This signal is used to issue an alarm on
the PMC or request the operator to change the tool.
The number of executed punches and maximum number of punches can
be set and displayed by using the [TOOL] soft key on the
<OFFSET/SETTING> screen, and the [TOOL LIFE] screen.
323
34.14
C AXIS CONTROL Cxx+∆θx (n–1)
Cxx+∆θ
#2
Cxx
#n
#1
∆θ
θ
G77Ir Jθ P∆θ Kn Cxx ;
The angle position of the die (Tool) can be altered by the command from
tape, memory, and MDI.
In the past, a plurality of dies were required when the location was
different, even when the die shape was the same, but one die is sufficient
by optionally changing the die angle position, and 4 corners of a work can
be chamfered with a single die, thus reducing the die change time. In the
bolt hole circle, arc pattern function, and circular nibbling, the C–axis is
controlled automatically so that one side of a die always faces the center
of the circle at each hole position.
34.14.1 C–axis command is always regarded as an absolute command regardless

Relation with of incremental command (G91) and absolute command (G90).
Absolute/Incremental
Command (G90/G91)
34.14.2 C axis can be automatically positioned to the commanded position in the

Positioning to Smaller smaller rotation angle from the present position.
Angle Rotation
Direction
34.14.3 This function allows a T command to be executed after positioning the

Relation between T C–axis to the reference point automatically when the T command is
specified on the tape, memory or MDI if the T–axis can move only when
Command and C Axis the C–axis is at the reference point (the fixed position on the machine at
Command which C–axis can be reached by the manual reference point return).
34.14.4 Synchronous C–axis control can be performed for the punch and die by
effecting control using either the same servo motor or separate servo
Controlling the Punch
motors.
and Die
324
34.14.5 This function can be used for die–indexable tools. It simplifies

C–axis Position mechanical adjustment like reference position adjustment performed
during tool mounting by effecting automatic C–axis compensation for
Compensation tool indexing. The amount of compensation and the tool number for the
die–indexable tool are specified by parameters. (Up to 20 tools with tool
numbers of 1 to 9999)
34.14.6 C–axis backlash compensation can be effected for die–indexable tools for
individual indexes. Changing the backlash compensation value by index
C–axis Backlash
enables high–precision machining. The amount of compensation and the
Compensation for tool number for the die–indexable tool are specified by parameters. (Up
Individual Indexes to 20 tools with tool numbers of 1 to 9999)
34.15 The S code is specified with a 5-digit numeric value following address S.
The 5-digit numeric value is output to the PMC as a 32-bit binary code.
S CODE OUTPUT The code is maintained until another S is specified. The maximum
number of input digits for S can be specified using a parameter.
34.16 This function is designed for high–speed precise machining in auxiliary

function. With this function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration
ADVANCED and the delay in the servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes
PREVIEW CONTROL higher can be suppressed.
(G08) The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when advanced preview control mode is
entered.
Format
G08 P_ ;
P1 : Turn on advanced preview control mode.

P0 : Turn off advanced preview control mode.
in advanced preview control mode, the following functions are available:

D Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
D Automatic corner deceleration function
325
35. INTERFACE WITH THE
POWER MATE CNC NC FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
35 INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC
326
35. INTERFACE WITH THE
B–64112EN/01 NC FUNCTION POWER MATE CNC
35.1 This function allows the use of a manual pulse generator on the host side
to perform manual handle feed for the (β servo unit. The host posts pulses
FANUC SERVO from the manual pulse generator to the (β servo unit via the I/O Link. A
MOTOR (β SERIES I/O magnification can also be applied to the pulse output signal of the manual
LINK OPTION pulse generator by parameter setting. This function can be used only with
the peripheral equipment control interface.
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERFACE
(PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT
CONTROL)
327
III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
B–64112EN/01 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Manual Guide 0i was developed to aid in generating a machining program

for the Series 0i–B/0i–C. Manual Guide 0i is provided for lathes and
machining centers (or milling machines).
A machining program, in which alphabetical addresses and numerical

values are paired, includes a series of machining commands specified by
the operator. This enables a CNC program to be created as a series of
commands that perform machining operations. Multiple machining
commands can be combined to perform complicated machine work.
Manual Guide 0i can also edit an exiting machining program. Online help
that comes with the product can be used during development of a program
or used as a reference for programming.
Manual Guide 0i has the following functions.

1) Process data input
Helps the operator to input process data such as the cutting speed or
spindle rotation commands.
2) G–code assistance
Uses text or a figure to describe G–codes that can be normally used by
the CNC and assist in inputting the codes.
3) M–code assistance
Describes M–codes that can be used by the machine and assists in
inputting the codes. Machine tool builders can change an indicated M
code by using the macro executor.
4) Cycle machining
Manual Guide 0i for machining centers (or milling machines) allows
drilling, facing of standard figures, pocketing, and grooving to be
input and executed as cycle machining.
Manual Guide 0i for lathes allows turning drilling, turning
rough/finish machining of an arbitrary figure, turning grooving, and
turning threading to be input and executed as cycle machining.
5) Contour programming
Allows input of an arbitrary figure consisting of lines and circles. This
contour programming function includes advanced figure calculations
such as 10–block pending calculation or 11–pattern auxiliary
calculation.
331
2. PROCESS ASSISTANCE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
2 PROCESS ASSISTANCE
The [PROCESS CONTROL INFORMATION] screen allows you to

input information on the process requirements of a machining program.
PROCESS CONTROL INFORMATION
–– FEED ––– F=
–– SPINDLE –– DIR=
S=
–– COOLANT –– CLT=
–– TOOLING –– NUM=
H=
D=
–– TL COMPG ––LEN=
DIA=
INPUT DESIRED FEED RATE

0 ~ 30000
NUM=
332
B–64112EN/01 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 3. G–CODE ASSISTANCE
3 G–CODE ASSISTANCE
To access the “G–Code Assistance” press the “G CODE” soft–key on the

display unit. This will display the G–Code help menu. The G–code help
menu lists all of the G–codes supported by your control system. The menu
is divided into several pages. The total number of help pages and the
current page appear at the top of the menu.
G CODE HELP 1 OF 7
G00 RAPID MOVE
G01 LINEAR MOVE
G02 CW CIRCLE
G03 CCW CIRCLE
G04 DWELL
G08 LOOK AHEAD CONTROL
G09 EXACT STOP
G17 XY PLANE SELECT
G18 XZ PLANE SELECT
PAGE KEYS FOR MORE

NUM=
INPUT 17 FOR G17 HELP
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
The following description assumes G–codes used to set the work

coordinate system.
By typing in “92” and pressing the “INPUT” key on the MDI key panel,
the help information for G92 is displayed.
G92 SETTING WORK COORD. SYSTEM

By specifying G92 command, a workpiece
coordinate system (selected by G54 to
G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece
coordinate system origin. Then, the
workpiece zero point offset values.
This means that all the workpiece
coordinate systems are shifted by the
same amount.
[TEXT ][GRAPH. ][ ][ ][ ]
The above screen uses text for explanation, but a figure for explanation
can also be displayed by pressing [GRAPH.]. However, not all G–codes
are shown in this figure.
333
3. G–CODE ASSISTANCE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
G92 SETTING WORK COORD. SYSTEM

G92X100Y100 offsets the G54 coords.
by vector A in X and Y axes.
200
T POS
100
100
NEW ORIGIN
A
OLD ORIGIN
100 200
[TEXT ][GRAPH. ][ ][ ][ ]
334
B–64112EN/01 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 4. M–CODE ASSISTANCE
4 M–CODE ASSISTANCE
M–codes are used by the CNC to ask the executing of the machine
auxiliary process. The M–code assistance function can be used to input
M–codes. To select M–code assistance, press the [M CODE] soft key of
the display unit. A list of M–codes appears.
M CODE HELP 1 OF 3
M00 PROGRAM STOP
M01 OPTIONAL STOP
M02 PROGRAM END
M03 SPINDLW CW
M04 SPINDLE CCW
M05 SPINDLE STOP
M06 TOOL CHANGE
M07 FLOOD COOLANT
M08 MIST COOLANT
PAGE KEYS FOR MORE

NUM=
INPUT 30 FOR M30 HELP
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
The following is the screen example of optional stop M code.
M01 OPTIONAL STOP

M01 will cause the part program to stop
execution only if the OPTIONAL STOP
function is active. This is usually a
push button on the operator panel.
If the optional stop becomes active, the
operator will be required to press the
cycle start button to continue.
[TEXT ][GRAPH. ][ ][ ][ ]
335
5. CANNED CYCLE MACHINING AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
5 CANNED CYCLE MACHINING
336
B–64112EN/01 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 5. CANNED CYCLE MACHINING
5.1 The cycle machining function of Manual Guide 0i allows you to input
cycle machining blocks.
CYCLE MACHINING Manual Guide 0i for machining centers (or milling machines) can use the
FOR MACHINING following cycle machining functions.
CENTERS (OR Hole Machining
MILLING MACHINES) G1000 Center drilling
G1001 Drilling
G1002 Tapping
Machining type
G1003 Reaming
block
G1004 Boring
G1005 Fine boring
G1006 Back boring
G1210 Hole pattern – Points
G1211 Hole pattern – Line (EQ)
G1212 Hole pattern – Line (NE)
G1213 Hole pattern – Grid
Figure block
G1214 Hole pattern – Square
G1215 Hole pattern – Circle
G1216 Hole pattern – Arc (EQ)
G1217 Hole pattern – Arc (NE)
Face machining
Machining type G1020 Facing – Rough
block G1021 Facing – Finish
G1220 Fixed figure – Square
Figure block
G1221 Fixed figure – Circle
Pocket machining
G1040 Pocketing – Rough
G1041 Pocketing – Bottom finish
Machining type G1042 Pocketing – Side finish
block G1043 Pocketing – Chamfer
G1044 Pocket – Center drilling
G1045 Pocket – Drilling
G1220 Fixed figure – Square
Figure block G1221 Fixed figure – Circle
G1222 Fixed figure – Track
Groove machining
G1050 Grooving – Rough
G1051 Grooving – Bottom finish
Machining type G1052 Grooving – Side finish
block G1053 Grooving – Chamfer
G1054 Center drilling
G1055 Drilling
Figure block G1223 Fixed figure – Line
337
5. CANNED CYCLE MACHINING AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
5.2 Manual Guide 0i for lathes can use the following cycle machining
functions.
CYCLE MACHINING
Lathe Drilling
FOR LATHES
G1100 Center drilling
G1101 Drilling
Machining type
G1102 Tapping
block
G1103 Reaming
G1104 Boring
Stock Removal in Turning
G1120 Outer rough
G1121 Inner rough
Machining type G1122 End face rough
block G1123 Outer finish
G1124 Inner finish
G1125 End face finish
G1400 Start point
G1401 Line
Figure block G1402 Arc CW
G1403 Arc CCW
G1406 End of figures
Grooving in Turning
G1130 Outer rough
Machining type G1132 End face rough
block G1133 Outer finish
G1135 End face finish
G1460 Normal form
Figure block
G1461 Trapezoidal form
Threading
Machining type G1140 Outer thread
block G1141 Inner thread
Figure block G1450 Start point and end points
338
6. OPERATIONS OF CONTOUR
B–64112EN/01 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING
6 OPERATIONS OF CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
The contour programming function of Manual Guide 0i allows you to

input a maximum of 40 types of arbitrary figures consisting of lines and
circles. This “contour programming” involves high–performance contour
calculation such as 10 blocks pending and auxiliary calculation with 11
patterns.
In “contour programming,” an operator can enter contour figures
consisting of lines and circles and easily create a tool motion NC program
of G01/G02/G03 that traces the contour figure.
Only tool motion commands are supported; other commands such as
auxiliary functions must be entered manually in some other way.
While entering a contour figure, auxiliary calculation (other than cross
point calculation) can be used to obtain the end point coordinate values
of a figure.
339
6. OPERATIONS OF CONTOUR
PROGRAMMING AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–64112EN/01
6.1 (1) Data items in which auxiliary calculation can be used

AUXILIARY (a) Start point
CALCULATION – Coordinate (X, Y) of start point
FUNCTION (b) Line
– Coordinate (X, Y) of end point
– Angle of a line (A)
(c) Arc
– Coordinate (X, Y) of end point
– Coordinate (I, J) of center
– Specifying an arc
(2) Calculation type available in auxiliary calculation
(a) Calculation of coordinate
– A point specified by polar coordinate
– A point specified by a point, angle and distance
– A point specified by rotating a point
– Neighbor point of a line
– Cross point between 2 lines
– Cross point between line and arc
– Cross point between 2 arcs
(b) Calculation of angle
– Angle of the line passes 2 points
– Angle of a line rectangular to the line passes 2 points
(c) Specify an arc (Center and radius)
– An arc passes 1 point and its center coordinate has been
determined
– An arc passes 2 points and its radius has been determined
– An arc passes 3 points
SELECT CALCULATION OF START POINT
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
1. POINT BY POLAR COORD.

[ ][ ][ ][ OK ][CANCEL ]
(Example of the auxiliary calculation menu screen)
340
APPENDIX
B–64112EN/01 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
A RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
343
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–64112EN/01
A.1
T SERIES
Linear axis
D In case of metric input,
feed screw is metric
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command increment X : 0.0005 mm (diameter) X : 0.00005 mm (diameter)
Z : 0.001 mm (radius) Z : 0.0001 mm (radius)
Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 Feed per minute : Feed per minute :
1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/step 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 mm 0 to ±0.255 mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec
D In case of inch input,

Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command increment X : 0.00005 inch (diameter) X : 0.000005 inch (diameter)
Z : 0.0001 inch (radius) Z : 0.00001 inch (radius)
Max. programmable dimension ±9999.9999 inch ±393.70078 inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 inch/step 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 mm 0 to ±0.255 mm
344

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable dimension ±9999.9999 inch ±999.99999 inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 4000 inch/min
0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 inch/step 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.0255 inch 0 to ±0.0255 inch

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 960 inch/min
1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/step 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.0255 inch 0 to ±0.0255 inch
345
Rotation axis
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Least command increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 deg/min 1 to 100000 deg/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1deg/step 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 deg/step
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 deg 0 to ±0.255 deg
NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity.
As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system
must also be considered.
346
A.2
M SERIES
Linear axis
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command increment 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Max. programmable dimension ±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step mm/step mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.99 mm 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec

Increment system
Least input increment 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command increment 0.01 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 inch ±9999.9999 inch ±393.70078 inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
inch/step inch/step 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch
347

feed screw is inch
Increment system
Least input increment 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 inch ±9999.9999 inch ±9999.9999 inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 9600 inch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range *1 0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
inch/step inch/step 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch

feed screw is inch
Increment system
Least input increment 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Max. programmable dimension ±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 9600 inch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 mm/step 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/step 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.99 mm 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
348
Rotation axis
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Least command increment ±0.001 deg ±0.0001 deg
Max. programmabledimension ±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 deg/min 1 to 100000 deg/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 deg/step 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 deg/step
NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity.
As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system
must also be considered.
349
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–64112EN/01
B FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
350
B–64112EN/01 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
B.1 Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.

In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis
T SERIES
addresses using X and Z.
x = 1st basic axis (X usually)
z = 2nd basic axis (Z usually)
(1/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format
IP
Positioning (G00) G00 IP_ ;
Start point
IP
Linear interpolation (G01) G01 IP_ F_;
Start point
Start point
G02 R_
Circular interpolation G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
(G02, G03) G03 I_ J_
R G02
I G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
K (x, z)
G02 R_
(x, z) G03 G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
R I
Start
K point
Dwell (G04) X_ ;
G04
P_
Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 IP_R_;

(G07.1) Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G107) G07.1 IP0 ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode
cancel
R: Radius of cylinder
Polar coordinate interpolation G12.1 ;

(G12.1, G13.1) Polar coordinate interpolation
(G112, G113) mode
G13.1 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation
mode cancel
Change of offset value by Tool geometry offset value

program(G10) G10 P_ X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R(C)_
Q_ ;
P=1000+Geometry offset number
Tool wear offset value
G10 P_ X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R(C)_
Q_ ;
P=Wear offset number
351
(2/5)
Plane selection G17 ;

(G17, G18, G19) G18 ;
G19 ;
Inch/metric conversion Inch input : G20

(G20, G21) Metric input : G21
Stored stroke check 2, 3 (X, Z) G22X_ Z_ I_K_ ;

(G22, G23) G23 ;
(I, K)
Spindle speed fluctuation G25 ;

detection (G25, G26) G26 P_ Q_ R_ ;
Reference position return IP

G27 IP_ ;
check (G27)
Start position
Reference position (G28)

Reference position return G28 IP_ ;
(G28)
Intermediateposition G30 IP_ ;
2nd reference position re- IP
turn (G30)
2nd reference
position (G30) Start position
Skip function (G31) IP G31 IP_ F_;
Skip
Start signal
position
F
Thread cutting (G32) Equal lead thread cutting
G32 IP_ F_;
Variable–lead threading G34 IP_ F_K_;
Measurement
Automatic tool compensation position G36 X xa ;
(G36, G37) G37 Z za ;
Measurement
position arrival
signal
Start
position
Compensation
value
352
(3/5)
Tool nose radius

compensation ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
G41 G41
G42 IP_ ;
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(G40, G41, G42)
G40 : Cancel
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ G40
G42
Coordinate system setting G50 IP_ ;

X
Spindle speed setting Coordinate system setting
(G50) G50 S_ ; Maximum spindle speed
setting
Polygon turning G51.2 (G251) P_Q_ ;

(G50.2, G51.2) P,Q : Rotation ratio of spindle and
(G250, G251) rotary axis
G50.2 (G250) ; Cancel
Workpiece coordinate G50.3 IP 0 ;

system preset (G50.3)
Local coordinate system G52 IP _ ;

setting (G52) Local coordinate
x
IP Workpiece
y
coordinate
Machine coordinate system G53 IP _ ;

selection (G53)
Workpiece coordinate system G54
selection (G54 to G59) IP :
Offset from IP _ ;
workpiece G59
reference
point
system
Machine coordinate system
Custom macro One–shot call

(G65, G66, G67) Macro G65 P_L <argument> ;
O_ ; P : Program number
G65 P_L_ ; L : Repetition count
M99 ; Modal call
G66 P_L <argument> ;
G67 ; Cancel
353
(4/5)
Canned cycle Refer to II.13. FUNCTIONS TO N_ G70 P_ Q_ ;

(G71 to G76) SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING G71 U_ R_ ;
(G90, G92, G94) G71 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73 U_ W_ R_ ;
G73 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G75 R_ ;
G75 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G76 P_ Q_ R_ ;
G76 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G90
G92 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
G94
Canned cycle for drilling See Chapter 13, “Functions to G80 ; Cancel
(G80 to G89) Simplify Programming” in Part II. G83 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_Q_P_F_M_K_;
G84 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G85 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G87 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_Q_P_F_M_K_;
G88 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G89 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_P_F_M_K_;
Constant surface speed m/min or feet/min G96 S_ ;

control (G96/G97) G97 ; Cancel
N (rpm)
Feed per minute (G98) mm/min inch/min G98 … F_ ;

mm/rev inch/rev
Feed per revolution (G99) G99 … F_ ;
Chamfering, Corner R k
C(K) "k
X_ ; R_ P_ ;
C(I)"i
i Z_ ; R_ P_ ;
R
354
(5/5)
Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute programming

programming G91_ ; Incremental programming
(G90/G91) G90_ G91_ ;
(With G code system B or C) Absolute and incremental
programming
Return to initial point/R point G98 G98_ ;

I point
(G98, G99) G99_ ;
(With G code system B or C)
G99
R point
Z point
355
B.2 Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.

In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis
M SERIES
addresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_Y_Z_A_).
x = 1st basic axis (X usually)
y = 2nd basic axis (Y usually)
z = 3rd basic axis (Z usually)
(1/6)
IP
Positioning (G00) G00 IP_ ;
Start point
IP
Linear interpolation (G01) G01 IP_ F_;
Start point
Start point
G02 R_
Circular interpolation G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
(G02, G03) G03 I_ J_
R G02
J
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
I (x, y)
(x, y) G03 G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
Start point G03 J_ K_
R J
Helical interpolation z G02 R_

(G02, G03) G17 X_ Y_ a_F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ a_F_ ;
Start G03 I_ K_
point (xyz)
G02 R_
(x, y) G19 Y_ Z_ a_F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
When G03 is specified for
the XY plane a: Any address other than that of
a circular interpolation axis
Dwell (G04) X_ ;
G04
P_
Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 IP_R_ ;

(G07.1) Cylindrical interpolation mode
R : Radius of cylinder
G07.1 IP 0 ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
356
(2/6)
Advanced preview control G08 P1 ;

(G08) Advanced preview control mode on
G08 P0 ;
Advanced preview control mode off
Exact stop (G09) Velocity

G01
G09 G02 IP_;
Time G03
Change of offset
value by program @ Tool offset memory A
(G10) G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
@ Tool offset memory B
G10 L10 P_ R_ ;
(Geometry offset value)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
(Wear offset value)
@ Tool offset memory C
G10 L10 P_ R_ ;
(Geometry offset value/H)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
(Wear offset value/H)
G10 L12 P_ R_ ;
(Geometry offset value/D)
G10 L13 P_ R_ ;
(Wear offset value/D)
Polar coordinate input Local coordinate G17 G16 Xp_Yp ⋅⋅⋅ ;

(G15, G16) system G18 G16 Zp_Xp ⋅⋅⋅ ;
Yp
Xp G19 G16 Yp_Zp ⋅⋅⋅ ;
G15 ; Cancel
Yp
Xp
system
Plane selection G17 ;

(G17, G18, G19) G18 ;
G19 ;
Inch/metric G20 ; Inch input

conversion (G20, G21)
G21 ; Metric input
Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ ;

(G22, G23)
G23 ; Cancel
(IJK)
IP
check (G27)
Start point
357
(3/6)
Reference position (G28)

(G28)
Intermediateposition G30 IP_ ;
2nd, reference position re- IP
turn (G30)
2nd reference
position (G30) Start point
Reference position
Return from reference G29 IP_ ;
position to start point
(G29)
Intermediateposition IP
IP
Skip function (G31) G31 IP_ F_;
Skip signal
Start point
Threading (G33) F G33 IP _ F ;
ÅÅ ÅÅ
F : Lead
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÇÇÇ
ÅÅ
ÇÇÇ
Cutter compensation C G41 G17 G41
G18 D_ ;
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(G40 to G42) G42
G19
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
D : Tool offset number
G42 G40 : Cancel
G40
Normal–direction control G41.1 (G151)

(G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) Normal–direction control left
(G150, G151, G152) G42.1 (G152)
Normal–direction control right
G40.1 (G150)
Normal–direction control cancel
Tool length compensation A G43

(G43, G44, G49) Z_ H_ ;
Offset G44
G43
Z H_ ;
G44
H : Tool offset number

G49 : Cancel
358
(4/6)
Tool length compensa- Z_

G17 G43
tion B Y_
G18 G44 H_ ;
(G43, G44, G49) X_
G19
G17 G43
G18 H_ ;
G19 G44

G49 : Cancel
Tool length compensation C G43

(G43, G44, G49) a_H_ ;
G44
a : Any address of a single axis

G49 : Cancel
Tool offset (G45 to G48) G 45 Increase G45

G46
IP Decrease G47 IP _ D_ ;
G 46
2 times G48
G 47 increase D : Tool offset number
2 times
G 48 IP
decrease
Compensation value
Scaling (G50, G51) P4 P3 G51 X_Y_Z_ P_

;
P4’ P3’ I_J_K_
IP
P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z : Coordinates of center of
P1’ P2’ scaling
G50 ; Cancel
P1 P2
Programmable mirror image Mirror G51.1 IP_ ;

(G50.1, G51.1) G50.1 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Cancel
IP
Local coordinate system G52 IP_ ;

setting (G52)
x Local coordinate
IP
y Workpiece
coordinate
Machine coordinate system G53 IP_ ;

selection (G53)
359
(5/6)
Workpiece coordinate G54

IP
system selection Offset from : IP _ ;
(G54 to G59) workpiece G59
Additional workpiece coordi- origin
nate system selection G54.1 P _ IP_ ;
Workpiece
(G54.1)
coordinate system
Machine coordinate system
Unidirectional positioning G60 IP_ ;

IP
(G60)
Cutting mode G64_ ; Cutting mode

Exact stop mode v G61_ ; Exact stop mode
Tapping mode G63_ ; Tapping mode
G64
t
Automatic corner override G62_ ; Automatic corner override

v
G61
t
Custom macro One–shot call

(G65, G66, G67) Macro G65 P_L <argument> ;
O_ ; P : Program number
G65 P_L_ ; L : Repetition count
M99 ; Continuous–state call
G66 P_L <argument> ;
G67 ; Cancel
Coordinate system rotation G17 X_Y_

Y
(G68, G69) G68 G18 Z_X_ Ra;
G19 Y_Z_
a
(x y) G69 ; Cancel
X
XY plane
Canned cycles Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO G80 ; Cancel

(G73, G74, G80 – G89) SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
G73
G74
G76
X_ Y_ Z_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ K_ ;
G81
:
G89
Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute command

programming (G90/G91)
G91_ ; Incremental command
G90_ G91_ ; Combined use
360
(6/6)
Change of workpiece
coordinate system (G92) ÇÇ
ÇÇ IP
G92 IP_ ;
Workpiece coordinate G92.1 IP 0 ;

system preset (G92.1)
Feed per minute/rotation mm/min inch/min G98 F_ ;
(G94, G95) mm/rev inch/rev G99 F_ ;
Constant surface speed G96 S_ ;

control (G96, G97) G97 S_ ;
Initial point return / R point G98_ ;

G98
return (G98, G99) Initial
level G99_ ;
G99
R level
Z point
361
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE APPENDIX B–64112EN/01
C LIST OF TAPE CODE
ISO code EIA code
Custom
Remarks macro B
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Not
Used
used
0 f f f 0 f f Number 0
1 f f f f f 1 f f Number 1
3 f f f f f 3 f f f f Number 3
7 f f f f f f f 7 f f f f Number 7
A f f f a f f f f Address A
B f f f b f f f f Address B
C f f f f f c f f f f f f Address C
D f f f d f f f f Address D
E f f f f f e f f f f f f Address E
F f f f f f f f f f f f f Address F
G f f f f f g f f f f f f Address G
H f f f h f f f f Address H
I f f f f f i f f f f f f Address I
J f f f f f j f f f f Address J
K f f f f f k f f f f Address K
L f f f f f l f f f f Address L
M f f f f f m f f f f Address M
N f f f f f n f f f f Address N
O f f f f f f f o f f f f Address O
P f f f p f f f f f f Address P
Q f f f f f q f f f f Address Q
R f f f f f r f f f f Address R
S f f f f f s f f f f Address S
T f f f f f t f f f f Address T
U f f f f f u f f f f Address U
V f f f f f v f f f f Address V
W f f f f f f f w f f f f Address W
X f f f f f x f f f f f f Address X
Y f f f f f y f f f f Address Y
362
B–64112EN/01 APPENDIX C. LIST OF TAPE CODE
ISO code EIA code
Custom
Remarks macro B
Not
Used
used
Z f f f f f z f f f f Address Z
Delete
DEL f f f f f f f f f Del f f f f f f f f (deleting a
mispunch)
No. punch.
With EIA
code, this
code cannot
NUL f Blank f
be used in a
significant
information
section.
BS f f f BS f f f f Backspace
HT f f f Tab f f f f f f Tabulator
LF or NL f f f CR or EOB f f End of block
Carriage
CR f f f f f ___ f
return
SP f f f SP f f Space V V
Absolute
% f f f f f ER f f f f
rewind stop
Control out
( f f f (2–4–5) f f f f (start of com-
ment)
Control in
) f f f f f (2–4–7) f f f f (end of
comment)
+ f f f f f + f f f f Plus sign n
– f f f f f – f f Minus sign
Colon
: f f f f f ___ f
(address O)
Optional
/ f f f f f f f / f f f f
block skip
Period
. f f f f f . f f f f f f (decimal
point)
Parameter
# f f f f f f Sharp
(No. 6012)
$ f f f ___ f Dollar sign
& f f f f f & f f f f Ampersand n f
’ f f f f f ___ f Apostrophe n n
Parameter
* f f f f f f Asterisk n
(No. 6010)
, f f f f f , f f f f f f Comma
; f f f f f f f ___ f Semicolon
Left angle
< f f f f f f n n
bracket
363
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE APPENDIX B–64112EN/01
ISO code EIA code
Custom
Remarks macro B
Not
Used
used
Parameter
= f f f f f f f f Equal sign n
(No. 6011)
Right angle
> f f f f f f f ___ f n n
bracket
Question
? f f f f f f f ___ f n f
mark
Commercial
@ f f f ___ f n f
at mark
Quotation
” f f ___ f n n
mark
Parameter Left square
[ f f f f f f f f n
(No. 6013) bracket
Parameter Right square
] f f f f f f f f n
(No. 6014) bracket
NOTE
1 The symbols in the Remarks column have the following meanings:
Blank: Registered in memory as significant information. Any invalid use of these
codes in information other than a comment will cause an alarm.
: Not registered in memory (ignored)
n : Registered in memory but ignored during the execution of a program
f : Registered in memory. The use of these codes in information other than
a comment will cause an alarm.
j : Not registered in memory when used in information other than a comment.
Registered in memory when used in a comment.
2 Any code other than those listed in the table is always ignored, provided its parity
is valid.
3 Any code having an invalid parity will cause a TH alarm. Within a comment,
however, such a code is ignored and will not cause a TH alarm.
4 With EIA code, the code with all eight holes punched has special meaning. It is
ignored and does not cause any parity alarm.
364
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–64112EN/01 APPENDIX EACH UNIT
D EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Name Specification Fig., No.
CNC control unit (7.2″/8.4″ LCD, MDI horizontal type) Fig. U1

CNC control unit (7.2″/8.4″ LCD, MDI vertical type) Fig. U2
I/O unit for 0i A02B–0309–C001 Fig. U5
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personal computer side (ISA) A20B–8001–0583
Fig. U16(a)
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personal computer side (ISA) A20B–8001–0582
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personal computer side (PCI) A20B–8001–0961
Fig. U16(b)
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personal computer side (PCI) A20B–8001–0960
α position coder 10000min–1 A860–0309–T302 Fig. U17
Manual pulse generator A860–0203–T001 Fig. U18
A860–0203–T004
A860–0203–T005
A860–0203–T007
Pendant type manual pulse generator Fig. U19
A860–0203–T010
A860–0203–T012
A860–0203–T013
Separate detector interface unit A02B–0236–C205, C204 Fig. U20
Battery case for separate detector interface unit (ABS) A06B–6050–K060 Fig. U21
CNC battery unit for external installation A02B–0236–C281 Fig. U22
Cable length : 1m A02B–0120–C191
Punch panel Narrow width type Cable length : 2m A02B–0120–C192 Fig. U24
Cable length : 5m A02B–0120–C193
Main panel B A02B–0236–C231 Fig. U25
Machine operator’s
Sub panel A A02B–0236–C232 Fig. U26
panel
Sub panel B1 A02B–0236–C235 Fig. U27
365
EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–64112EN/01
Fig.U1 CNC control unit (7.2″/8.4″ LCD, MDI horizontal type)
366
Fig.U2 CNC control unit (7.2″/8.4″ LCD, MDI vertical type)
367
Fig.U5 I/O unit for 0i

Specification No. : A02B–0309–C001
368
–0582 –0583
Weight: 0.2 kg
Fig.U16 (a) High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC) (ISA bus version)
Specification No. : A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)
0961 0960
Weight: 0.1 kg
Fig.U16 (b) Interface Board for Personal Computer (PCI bus version)
Specification No. : A20B–8001–0960 (2 CH)
A20B–8001–0961 (1 CH)
369
MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P
Fig.U17 α position coder

Specification No.: A860–0309–T302 (10000 min–1 maximum)
370
3–M4
On the f72 circumference
Fig. U24 External dimensions of manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0203–T001
371
(1) A860–0203–T004 to T009
90 38.0
25
Y Z X1 X10X100
X 4
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal
(2) A860–0203–T010 to T015
90 38.0
25
Z 4 X1 X10 X100
Y
X 5
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal
Fig.U19 Pendant type manual pulse generator

Specification No. : A860–0203–T004 to T015
372
COP10B COP10A
JF101(JF105)
JF102(JF106)
JF103(JF107)
JF104(JF108)
CP11
JA4A
The connector names in parentheses are for

an expansion unit. The expansion unit does
not have connectors CP11, JA4A, COP10A,
and COP10B.
Fig.U20 External dimensions of separate detector interface unit
373
Negative polarity indication

103
4–M4 counter Positive polarity indication
sinking
Plus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
103
93
Minus terminal
with 3–M3
screw holes
FANUC
40
4–f4.3 mounting hole
Arrow view A
14.1
106.3
92.2
13.2
78 78
Note) The battery is not included.

A
Fig.U21 External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate detector

Specification No. : A06B–6050–K060
374
Main unit
Cover
103
115
M4 tap × 4
70
81 93
Mounting panel hole drilling

13.5 47
Mounting hole (countersink)
145
The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.
Fig. U22 External dimensions of external CNC battery unit
375
Mounting hole
diagram
At the rear of the metal

panel, the area within 8
mm of the outside edge is
left unpainted.
Fig. U24 External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type)
376
Unit = mm Panel cut drawing

Weight: 1.6kg
Fig.U25 Machine operator’s panel (Main panel B)

377
Earth stud
(M4)
6–φ4
5
60
80
70
5 280 5
5
290
70
270
6–M3
140 140
70
66
274 Unit : mm
Weight : 0.6kg
Panel cut drawing
Fig.U26 Machine operator’s panel (Sub panel A)

378
Earth stud
(M4)
Unit = mm
Weight: 0.6kg Panel cut drawing
Fig.U27 Machine operator’s panel (Sub panel B1)

379
B–63832EN/01 Index
[Symbols] Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone, 321
Automatic Tool Offset (G37, G36) (T series), 183
αi Spindle Information Screen, 261
Auxiliary Calculation Function, 340
Auxiliary Function Lock, 228
Auxiliary Functions, 97, 98
[Numbers]
Axis Control, 206
1–block Plural M Command, 98
Axis Control with PMC, 213
2nd, 3rd and 4th Reference Position Return (G30), 63
Axis Move Direction Signal, 293
7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type),
230 Axis Names, 21
7.2″ Monochrome LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type),
232
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Horizontal Type), 231 [B]
8.4″ Color LCD/MDI Unit (Vertical Type), 233 Background Editing, 264
Backlash Compensation, 173
Backlash Compensation for Each Rapid Traverse and
[A] Cutting Feed, 173
Base Point Command of Multi–piece Machining, 316
Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91),
80 Basic Addresses and Command Value Range, 105
Accuracy Compensation Function, 171 Bell–shaped Acceleration/Deceleration After Cutting
Feed Interpolation, 55
Activation of Automatic Operation, 222
Bending Compensation (G38, G39), 319
Actual Spindle Speed Output (T series), 86
Bi–directional Pitch Error Compensation, 172
Addition of Custom Macro Common Variables, 198
Block Start Interlock, 289
Additional Optional Block Skip, 107
Bolt Hole Circle (G26), 306
Additional Workpiece Coordinate Systems (M series),
75 Buffer Register, 222
Advanced Preview Control (G08), 325
Advanced Preview Control (G08) (T series), 204
[C]
AI Advanced Preview Control (G05.1) (M series), 204
C Axis Control, 324
AI Contour Control (G05.1) (M series), 205
Cs Contour Control, 90
Alarm Signal, 292
C–axis Backlash Compensation for Individual In-
All Axes Interlock, 289 dexes, 325
All–axes Machine Lock, 228 C–axis Position Compensation, 325
Angular Axis Control, 214 Canned Cycle Machining, 336
Arbitrary Angular Axis Control, 214 Canned Cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80–G89, G98, G99)
(M series), 109
Arc (G77), 307
Canned Cycles for Cylindrical Grinding (T series),
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration, 52 143
Automatic Coordinate System Setting, 70 Canned Cycles for Drilling (G80–G89) (T series), 135
Automatic Corner Override (G62) (M series), 57 Canned Cycles for Turning (T series), 121
Automatic Operation, 219 Chamfering and Corner R ( T series), 136
Automatic Operation Signal, 292 Changeable Nibbling Mode 2 Steps, 304
Automatic Operation Start Signal, 292 Changing of Tool Offset Amount (Programmable Data
Automatic Operation Stop, 223 Input) (G10), 168
Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T series), 287
Automatic Reference Position Return (G28, G29) (M
series), 62 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03), 36
Automatic Repositioning (G75), 312 Clock Function, 238
i–1
Index B–63832EN/01
Command to Restart Punching Multiple Products, 318 Diameter and Radius Programming (T series), 83
Constant Surface Speed Control, 86 Direct Drawing Dimensions Programming (T series),
139
Constant Surface Speed Control Signal, 293
Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T se-
Continuous Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G78), 150 ries), 186
Continuous Press (Nibbling), 301 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured/Direct
Continuous Thread Cutting (T series), 46 Input of Workpiece Coordinate System Shift
Amount (T series), 185
Contrast Adjustment Screen, 259
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Mea-
Control Axis Detach, 207 sured, 190
Control–in/Control–out, 107 Directory Display and Punch for Each Group, 257
Controlled Axes, 20 Directory Display of Floppy Cassette, 241
Controlling the Punch and Die, 324 Display, 235
Conversational Programming with Graphic Function, Displaying and Setting Data, 234
266 Displaying Operation History, 256
Coordinate System Conversion, 175 Distribution End Signal, 292
Coordinate System Rotation (G68, G69) (M series), DNC Operation, 220
176
DNC Operation with Memory Card, 272
Coordinate Systems, 66
DNC2 Control, 272
Coordinate Value and Dimension, 79
Dry Run, 228
Counter Input in a Workpiece Coordinate System, 72
Dwell (G04), 58
Custom Macro, 191, 192
Dynamic Graphic Display, 243
Cut at Angle (G89), 309
Cutter Compensation (M series), 163
Cutter Compensation C (G40–G42), 163 [E]
Cutting Block Start Interlock, 289 Emergency Stop, 280
Cutting Cycle A (G77) (with G Code System A: G90), Equal lead thread cutting (G33) (with G code system
121 A: G32), 44
Cutting Feed Rate, 49 Erase CRT Screen Display, 257
Cutting Feed Rate Clamp, 49 Error Detection (T series), 56
Cutting Mode (G64) (M series), 57 Ethernet Function (Option Board), 273
Cycle Machining for Lathes, 338 Exact Stop (G09) (M series), 57
Cycle Machining for Machining Centers (or Milling Exact Stop Mode (G61) (M series), 57
Machines), 337
Execution of Automatic Operation, 222
Cycle Start, 222 Expanded External Workpiece Number Search, 221
Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1), 41 Extanded Part Program Editing, 265
Extended Tool Life Management (M series), 96
External Alarm Message, 295
[D] External Data Input, 294
Data Input/Output, 269 External Deceleration, 290
Data Input/Output Using a Memory Card, 271 External Dimensions of Each Unit, 365
Data Protection Key, 256 External I/O Device Control, 265
Data Server Function, 275 External Machine Zero Point Shift, 295
Decimal Point Input/Pocket Calculator Type Decimal External Memory and Sub Program Calling Function,
Point Input, 82 104
DI Status Output Signal, 293 External Motion Function, 304
Diagnosis Functions, 267 External Operation Function (G81) (M series), 120
i–2
External Operator’s Message, 296

External Program Input, 271
External Program Number Search, 295 [I]
External Tool Compensation, 295 ID Information Screen, 260
External Workpiece Coordinate System Shift, 295 Ignoring T–code, 322
External Workpiece Number Search, 221 In–position Signal, 292
Inch Input Signal, 293
Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21), 82
[F] Increment System, 22
FANUC Floppy Cassette, 270 Incremental Feed, 217
FANUC Handy File, 270 Index Table Indexing (M series), 142
FANUC Program File Mate, 270 Infeed Control (M series), 154
FANUC Servo Motor (β Series I/O Link Option Input Unit (10 Times), 23
Manual Handle Interface (Peripheral Equipment
Control), 327 Input/Output Devices, 270
Feed Functions, 47 Interface with the Power Mate CNC, 326
Feed Hold, 223 Interlock, 289
Feed Hold Signal, 292 Interlock for Each Axis, 289
Feed Rate Override, 51 Interlock for Each Axis Direction, 289
Field Networks, 278 Intermittent Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G79), 152
Finishing Cycle (G70), 131 Interpolation Functions, 32
FOCAS1/Ethernet Function, 274 Interruption Type Custom Macro, 198
Follow up Function, 207
Foreground Editing, 264
Functions and Tape Format List, 350 [J]
Functions for High Speed Cutting, 203 Jog and Handle Simultaneous Mode, 218
Functions for Punch Press, 298 Jog Feed, 217
Functions to Simplify Programming, 108 Jog Override, 51
[G] [K]
G–code Assistance, 333 Key Input from PMC (External Key Input), 297
Graphic Display Function, 242
Grid (G78, G79), 307
Grinding–wheel wear Compensation by Continuous
[L]
Dressing (M series), 170 Label Skip, 107
Grooving in X–axis (G75), 133 Language Selection, 238
Line at Angle (G76), 306
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration After Cutting Feed
[H] Interpolation, 54
Handle Interruption, 224 Linear Axis and Rotation Axis, 83
Helical Interpolation (G02, G03), 38 Linear Interpolation (G01), 35
Help Function, 254 Linear Scale Expansion Function with Absolute Ad-
dressing Reference Marks, 65
High–speed M/S/T/B Interface, 99
Linear Scale with Absolute Addressing Reference
High–speed Skip Signal Input, 181 Marks, 65
i–3
List of Specifications, 6 [N]

List of Tape Code, 362 NC Ready Signal, 292
Local Coordinate System (G52), 73 Normal Direction Control (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) (M
series), 209
Number of Registered Programs, 265
[M] Number of the All Controlled Axes, 21
Number of Tool Offsets, 167
M series, 29, 347, 356
Number of Tool Offsets (M series), 167
M–code Assistance, 335
Number of Tool Offsets (T series), 167
Machine Alarm Diagnosis, 268
Machine Coordinate System (G53), 67
Machine Lock on Each Axis, 228 [O]
Machining Condition Selecting Function, 262 One–cycle Press, 301
Macro Call (W Command), 313 One–digit F Code Feed (M series), 50
Macro Executor Function, 200 Operation Mode, 220
Main Program, 102 Operations of Contour Programming, 339
Maintenance Information Screen, 258 Optional Angle Chamfering/Corner Rounding (M se-
ries), 138
Manual Absolute On/Off, 218 Optional Block Skip, 107
Manual Handle Feed (1st), 217 Oscillation Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G74) , 145
Manual Handle Feed (2nd, 3rd) (T series: 2nd), 217 Oscillation Grinding Cycle (G73) , 145
Manual Interruption During Automatic Operation, 224 Override, 51
Manual Intervention and Return, 224 Override Cancel, 51
Manual Operation, 216 Overtravel, 282
Manual Per–revolution Feed (T series), 218 Overtravel Functions, 282
Manual Press, 303
Manual Reference Position Return, 61
[P]
Maximum Stroke, 24
Parameter Set Supporting Screen, 262
MDI Operation, 220
Part Program Storage and Editing, 263
Measurement Functions, 179 Part Program Storage Length, 265
Mechanical Handle Feed, 207 Password Function, 266
Memory and Call by A/B Macro, 311 Pattern Bas Point Command (G72), 310
Memory Operation, 220 Pattern Data Input, 199
Mirror Image, 207 Pattern Function, 306
Move Signal, 292 Pattern Repeating (G73), 130
Multi–piece Machining, 315 Peck Drilling in Z–axis (G74), 132
Multi–piecemachining Command, 317 Per Minute Feed (G94), 49
Per Revolution Feed (G95), 50
Multi–spindle Control, 91
Periodic Maintenance Screen, 258
Multi–step Skip Function (G31 P1–G31 P4), 181
Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19), 78
Multiple Call of Macro, 314
Play Back, 265
Multiple Repetitive Cycles for Turning (G70–G76) (T
series), 125 Plunge Direct Grinding Cycle (G77), 149
Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75), 147
Multiple–thread cutting (G33) (T series), 45
Polar Coordinate Command (G15, G16) (M series), 81
i–4
Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1), 39 Relation with Absolute/Incremental Command

(G90/G91), 324
Polygon Turning (G50.2, G51.2) (T series), 211
Remote Diagnostic, 256
Position Switch Function, 293
Reset, 223
Positioning (G00), 33
Reset Signal, 292
Positioning and Press off (G70), 304
Restart of Automatic Operation, 224
Positioning Time Constant Control, 305
Retraction for Rigid Tapping (M series), 226
Positioning to Smaller Angle Rotation Direction, 324
Retraction for Rigid Tapping by Specifying G30, 226
Power Mate CNC Manager, 277
Rewind, 221
Preparatory Functions, 25, 299
Rewinding Signal, 292
Press Functions, 301
Rigid Tapping, 115
Press Start Lock, 304
Rigid Tapping Bell–shaped Acceleration/Deceleration
Press Start Wait, 304 (M series), 119
Process Assistance, 332 Rotary Axis Roll–over Function, 83
Program Configuration, 101 Run Time & Parts Number Display, 238
Program End (M02, M30), 223
Program Name, 102
Program Number, 102 [S]
Program Number Search, 221 S Code Output, 85, 325
Program Restart, 224 Safety Functions, 279
Program Stop (M00, M01), 223 Safety Zone Check, 320
Program Test Functions, 227 Scaling (G50, G51) (M series), 177

Scheduling Function, 225
Programmable Mirror Image (G50.1, G51.1) (M se-
ries), 141 Screens for Servo Data and Spindle Data, 249
Programmable Parameter Input (G10, G11), 174 Second Auxiliary Functions, 98
Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area, Selection of Execution Programs, 221
320
Self Diagnosis Functions, 268
Sequence Number, 104
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop, 223
[R] Sequence Number Search, 221
Radius (G88), 309 Series 10/11 Tape Format, 201
Range of Command Value, 343 Series–10/11 Tape Format, 202
Rapid Traverse, 48 Servo Adjustment Screen, 249
Rapid Traverse Bell–shaped Acceleration/Decelera- Servo Information Screen, 260
tion, 53
Servo Off, 207
Rapid Traverse Block Overlap, 59
Servo Ready Signal, 292
Rapid Traverse Override, 51
Servo Setting Screen, 249
Rapid Traversing Signal, 293
Servo Waveform Function, 248
Reader/Punch Interfaces, 270
Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G54
Reference Position, 60 to G59), 71
Reference Position Return Check (G27), 63 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G92)
Reference Position Setting with Mechanical Stopper, (with G Code System A: G50), 68
64 Setting and Display Unit, 229, 230
Reference Position Shift, 64 Setting for Press Star Signal, 304
Relation between T Command and C Axis Command, Setting of Processing Method of Multi–piece Machin-
324 ing, 317
i–5
Setting the Reference Position without Dogs, 61 System Configuration Display Function, 252
Setting the Safety Zone, 321
Share Proof (G86), 308
Simple Synchronous Control, 208
[T]
T Code Output, 94, 322
Single Block, 228
T series, 26, 344, 351
Single Direction Positioning (G60) (M series), 34
T–axis Control, 322
Skip Function (G31), 180
Tandem Control, 214
Software Operator’s Panel, 239 Tandem Disturbance Elimination Control, 215
Spindle Adjustment Screen, 250 Tangential Speed Constant Control, 49
Spindle Monitor Screen, 251 Tape Codes, 104
Spindle Orientation, 92 Tape Format, 107
Spindle Output Control by the PMC, 85 Tape Horizontal (TH) Parity Check and Tape Vertical
(TV) Parity Check, 107
Spindle Output Switching, 92
Tapping Mode (G63) (M series), 57
Spindle Override, 86
Tapping Signal, 293
Spindle Positioning (T series), 87
Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting, 215
Spindle Setting Screen, 250 Thread cutting, 43
Spindle Speed Analog Output (S Analog Output), 85 Thread Cutting Cycle (G76), 134
Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection (G25, G26), 88 Thread Cutting Cycle (G78) (with G Code System A:
Spindle Speed Functions, 84 G92), 122
Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series), 223
Spindle Speed Serial Output (S Serial Output), 85
Thread Cutting Signal, 293
Spindle Synchronous Control, 92
Tool Compensation Function, 155
Square (G87), 308
Tool Compensation Memory, 165
Start Lock, 289
Tool Compensation Memory (M series), 165
Status Output, 291 Tool Functions, 93, 322
Stock Removal in Facing (G72), 129 Tool Geometry Compensation and Tool Wear Com-
Stock Removal in Turning (G71), 125 pensation, 157
Storage and Call of Plural Macro (Macro No.90 to Tool Length Automatic Measurement (G37) (M se-
99), 314 ries), 182
Tool Length Compensation (G43, G44, G49) (M se-
Storage Capacity of Macro, 314 ries), 161
Storage of Macro (U, V Command), 313 Tool Length Measurement (M series), 184
Stored Pitch Error Compensation, 172 Tool Life Management, 95, 323
Stored Stroke Check 1, 282 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40, G41, G42) (T
series), 158
Stored Stroke Check 2 (G22, G23) (M series), 283
Tool Offset (G45, G46, G47, G48) (M series), 162
Stored Stroke Checks 2 and 3 (G22, G23) (T series),
284 Tool Offset (T Code), 156
Stroke Limit Check Before Move, 285 Tool Offset (T series), 156
Tool Offset Amount Memory (T series), 165
Stroke Limit Externally Setting, 286
Tool Offset Compensation, 323
Sub Program, 103
Tool Offset Value Count Input (T series) , 190
Substitution of the Number of Required Parts and
Number of Machined Parts, 296 Torque Limit Skip (G31 P99, G31 P98) (T series), 181
Surface Grinding Canned Cycle (M series), 146 Traverse Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G72), 144
Traverse Grinding Cycle (G71), 144
Switching Rapid Traverse Feedrates, Time Constants,
AND/OR Servo Loop Gains According to the Posi- Turning Cycle in Facing (G79) (with G Code System
tioning Distance, 305 A: G94), 124
i–6
[U] [W]
U/V/W Macro Function, 313
Workpiece Coordinate System, 68
Unexpected Disturbance Torque Detection, 290
Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1), 76
Workpiece Coordinate System Shift (T series), 77
[V] Workpiece Origin Offset Value Change (Program-
mable Data Input) (G10), 74
Variable Lead Thread Cutting (G34) (T series), 45
i–7
Revision Record
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C/0i Mate–MODEL C DESCRIPTIONS (B–64112EN)
01 Jun., 2004
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

B-64112en 01 060302

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64112en 01 060302

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–9

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

1. Coordinate system setting

4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

8. Software operator’s panel and menu switches

10. Feed hold, override, and single block

11. Dry run

12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode

13. Program editing

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

1. Memory backup battery replacement

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

12.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

12.7 TAPE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

13.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

14.TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

14.1.2 Tool Geometry Compensation and Tool Wear Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

15.ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

16.COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

17.MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

18.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

18.5 MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

19.SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

20.FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

21.AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

22.MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

23.AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

23.3 ACTIVATION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

24.PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

25.SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

26.DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

26.9.4 Spindle Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

27.PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

28.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

29.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

29.8 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

30.SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

31.STATUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

32.EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

32.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

33.KEY INPUT FROM PMC (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

34.FUNCTIONS FOR PUNCH PRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

34.12.3 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

35.INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

2. PROCESS ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

3. G–CODE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

4. M–CODE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

5. CANNED CYCLE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

6. OPERATIONS OF CONTOUR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

C. LIST OF TAPE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362